X746x, X748x
User's Guide
April 2012
Machine type(s):
7526
Model(s):
576, 776
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
3
Loading the optional 550‑sheet special media tray................................................................................63
Loading the 2,000‑sheet high‑capacity feeder........................................................................................69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
4
Holding and forwarding faxes...............................................................................................................123
Erasing non‑volatile memory................................................................................................................224
Finding printer security information.....................................................................................................227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
5
Setting up e‑mail alerts.........................................................................................................................251
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety information
7
Safety information
Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily accessible.
Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: This product uses a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release emissions.
You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media
to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
Use care when you replace a lithium battery.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace it only with the same or an equivalent type of lithium battery. Do not recharge, disassemble, or
incinerate a lithium battery. Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions and local
regulations.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or
printer damage:
• Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
• Use the handholds located on both sides and rear of the printer to lift it.
• Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.
• Before setting up the printer, make sure there is adequate clearance around it.
• Lift the printer off the optional tray, and set it aside instead of trying to lift the tray and printer at the same time.
Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce risk of fire, use only the telecommunications (RJ‑11) cord provided
with this product or a UL Listed 26 AWG or larger replacement when connecting this product to the public
switched telephone network.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Make sure that all external connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system
connections) are properly installed in their marked plug-in ports.
This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific
manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer is not
responsible for the use of other replacement parts.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not cut, twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not
subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture
and walls. If any of these things happen, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect the power cord regularly
for signs of such problems. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it.
Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a professional service person.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety information
8
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer, unplug
the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the interior of the printer, unplug
the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or
make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning
storm.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high-capacity input tray, a duplex unit and an input
option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and
faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each paper drawer or tray
separately. Keep all other drawers or trays closed until needed.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Learning about the printer
9
Learning about the printer
Finding information about the printer
What are you looking for?
Find it here
Initial setup instructions:
Setup documentation—The setup documentation came
with the printer and is also available on the Lexmark Web
• Connecting the printer
• Installing the printer software
Additional setup and instructions for using the printer:
• Selecting and storing paper and specialty media
• Loading paper
User's Guide—The User's Guide is available on the
Software and Documentation CD.
For updates, check our Web site at
• Configuring printer settings
• Viewing and printing documents and photos
• Setting up and using the printer software
• Configuring the printer on a network (depending on your
printer model)
• Caring for and maintaining the printer
• Troubleshooting and solving problems
Instructions for:
Networking Guide—Open the Software and
Documentation CD, and then look for Printer and
Software Documentation under the Pubs folder. From
the list of publications, click the Networking Guide link.
• Installingthe printer usingGuided or Advanced wirelesssetup
• Connecting the printer to an Ethernet or a wireless network
• Troubleshooting printer connection problems
Help using the printer software
WindowsorMacHelp—Opena printersoftware program
or application, and then click Help.
?
Click
to view context‑sensitive information.
Notes:
• Help is automatically installed with the printer
software.
• The printer software is located in the printer
program folder or on the desktop, depending on
your operating system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Learning about the printer
10
What are you looking for?
Find it here
Latest supplemental information, updates, and customer
support:
Lexmark Support Web site—
• Documentation
• Driver downloads
• Live chat support
• E‑mail support
• Voice support
Note: Select your country or region, and then select
your product to view the appropriate support site.
Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for
your country or region can be found on the Support Web
site or on the printed warranty that came with your
printer.
Record the following information (located on the store
receipt and at the back of the printer), and have it ready
when you contact customer support so that they may
serve you faster:
• Machine Type number
• Serial number
• Date purchased
• Store where purchased
Warranty information
Warranty information varies by country or region:
• In the US—See the Statement of Limited Warranty
included with this printer, or at
• In other countries and regions—See the printed
warranty that came with your printer.
Selecting a location for the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
When selecting a location for the printer, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you plan to install any
options, then leave enough room for them also. It is important to:
• Set up the printer near a properly grounded and easily accessible electrical outlet.
• Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical Committee
156 standard.
• Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.
• Keep the printer:
– Clean, dry, and free of dust.
– Away from stray staples and paper clips.
– Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators.
– Free from direct sunlight and humidity extremes.
• Observe the recommended temperatures and avoid fluctuations:
Ambient temperature 15.6-32.2°C (60-90°F)
Storage temperature -40° to 40°C (-40 to 104°F)
• Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Learning about the printer
11
5
4
3
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
Right side 100 mm (3.9 in.)
Front 482.6 mm (19.5 in.)
Left side 100 mm (3.9 in.)
Rear
Top
100 mm (3.9 in.)
393.7 mm (15.5 in.)
Printer configurations
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor‑mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high‑capacity input tray, a duplex unit and an input
option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and
faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
You can configure your basic printer by adding up to four 550‑sheet optional drawers and a 2000‑sheet high‑capacity
feeder. A caster base and a spacer are supported in any configurations.
Spacers are nonfunctional trays that can be used to add height to a printer stack. Spacers must be:
• Placed directly on a caster base or table top.
• Placed at the bottom of all tray stacks, and cannot be used with an optional 2000‑sheet high‑capacity drawer.
For information on installing the spacers, see the instruction sheet that came with the hardware.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Learning about the printer
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
10
9
7
8
1
Automatic document feeder
(ADF)
2
3
4
5
ADF tray
Standard bin
Printer control panel
Optional 550‑sheet drawer
Note: This drawer is
standard on the X748dte
model.
6
7
Optional 550‑sheet drawer
Optional 2000‑sheet high
capacity feeder
8
Caster base
9
Standard 550‑sheet drawer
Multipurpose feeder
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Learning about the printer
13
Understanding the ADF and scanner glass
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents.
Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
You can use the ADF or the scanner glass to scan documents.
Using the ADF
The Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) can scan multiple pages, including duplex pages. When using the ADF:
• Load the document into the ADF faceup, short edge first.
• Load up to 50 sheets of plain paper in the ADF input tray.
• Scan sizes from 148 x 210 mm (5.8 x 8.3 in.) to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).
• Scan documents with mixed page sizes (letter and legal).
• Scan media weights from 52 to 120 g/m2 (14 to 32 lb).
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings)
into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Using the scanner glass
The scanner glass can be used to scan or copy single pages or book pages. When using the scanner glass:
• Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
• Scan or copy documents up to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).
• Copy books up to 25.4 mm (1 in.) thick.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Learning about the printer
14
Using the printer control panel
2
1
3
ABC
DEF
2
3
9
1
4
7
GHI
JKL
MNO
5
8
6
4
PQR
STU
WXYZ
0
5
6
10
8
9
7
Use the
To
View printing, e‑mailing, copying, and faxing options, as well as status and error messages.
1
2
Display
Sleep button Enable Sleep Mode or Hibernate Mode.
The following are the statuses of the indicator light and the Sleep button:
• Entering or waking from Sleep mode
– The indicator light is illuminated solid green.
– The Sleep button is illuminated.
• Operating in Sleep mode
– The indicator light is illuminated solid green.
– The Sleep button is illuminated solid amber.
• Entering or waking from Hibernate mode
– The indicator light is unilluminated.
– The Sleep button is blinking amber for 0.10 of a second, then goes completely unilluminated
for 1.9 seconds in pulsing pattern.
• Operating in Hibernate mode
– The indicator light is unilluminated.
– The Sleep button is blinking amber for 0.10 of a second, then goes completely unilluminated
for 1.9 seconds in pulsing pattern.
The following actions wake the printer from Sleep mode:
• Touching the screen or pressing any hard button
• Opening an input tray, cover, or door
• Loading paper into the automatic document feeder (ADF)
• Opening the scanner glass cover or lid.
• Sending a print job from the computer
• Performing a power‑on reset (POR) with the main power switch
3
Keypad
Enter numbers, letters, or symbols.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Learning about the printer
15
Use the
To
4
Dial pause
button
• Cause a two- or three-second dial pause in a fax number. In the Fax To field, a dial pause is
represented by a comma (,).
• Redial a fax number.
Notes:
• Pressing
outside of the Fax menu causes an error beep.
from the home screen redials the most recent fax number.
• Pressing
5
6
Indicator
light
• Off—The printer is off.
• Blinking green—The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.
• Solid green—The printer is on, but idle.
• Blinking red— Operator intervention is needed.
Start button
• Initiate the current job indicated on the display.
• Start a copy job with the default settings.
Note: Pressing the button while scanning has no effect.
7
8
9
Stop button Stop all printer activity.
Note: A list of options is displayed once Stoppedappears on the display.
Return to the home screen.
Home
button
Note: Pressing the Home button from the home screen resets all workflow factory defaults.
Back button
• Delete the right-most digit of the value in the Copy Count field. The factory default value of 1
appears if the entire number is deleted by pressing
numerous times.
• Delete the right-most digit of a number entered manually in the Fax Destination List field. You
can also press
press of
to delete an entire shortcut entry. When an entire line is deleted, another
causes the cursor to move up one line.
• Delete the character to the left of the cursor in the E-mail Destination List field. If the character
is in a shortcut, then the shortcut is deleted.
10 USB port
Connect a flash drive to the printer.
Note: Only the front USB port supports flash drives.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the home screen
16
Understanding the home screen
Understanding the home screen
When the printer is turned on, the display shows a basic screen, referred to as the home screen. Touch the home screen
buttons and icons to initiate an action such as copying, faxing, or scanning; to open the menu screen; or to respond to
messages.
Note: Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings,
administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.
Touch
Copy
E-mail
Fax
To
Access the Copy menus and make copies.
Access the E-mail menus and send e‑mails.
Access the Fax menus and send fax.
Access the printer menus.
Note: These menus are available only when the printer is in the Ready state.
FTP
Access the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) menus and scan documents directly to an FTP server.
Status message bar
• Show the current printer status such as Readyor Busy.
• Show printer conditions such as Toner Lowor Cartridge Low.
• Show intervention messages so the printer can continue processing.
Status/Supplies
• Display a warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to continue
processing.
• Access the messages screen for more information on the message, and how to clear it.
USB or USB Thumbdrive View, select, print, scan, or e‑mail photos and documents from a flash drive.
Note: This button appears only when you return to the home screen while a memory card or
flash drive is connected to the printer.
Bookmarks
Held Jobs
Create, organize, and save a set of bookmarks (URL) into a tree view of folders and file links.
Note: The tree view supports only bookmarks created from this function, and not from any
other application.
Display all current held jobs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the home screen
17
Other buttons that may appear on the home screen:
Touch
To
Search held jobs
Search on any of the following items:
• User name for held or confidential print jobs
• Job names for held jobs, excluding confidential print jobs
• Profile names
• Bookmark container or print job names
• USB container or print job names for supported file types
Release Held Fax
Lock Device
Access the list of held faxes.
Note: This button appears only when there are held faxes with a
scheduled hold time previously set.
Open a password entry screen. Enter the correct password to lock the
printer control panel.
Note: This button appears only when the printer is unlocked and
password has been set.
Unlock Device
Cancel Jobs
Open a password entry screen. Enter the correct password to unlock
the printer control panel.
Note: This button appears only when the printer is locked. The
printer control panel buttons and shortcuts cannot be used while
this appears.
Open the Cancel Jobs screen. The Cancel Jobs screen shows three
headings: Print, Fax, and Network.
The following options are available under the Print, Fax, and Network
headings:
• Print job
• Copy job
• Fax profile
• FTP
• E-mail send
Each heading has a list of jobs shown in a column under it which can
show only three jobs per screen. If more than three jobs exist in a
column, then an arrow appears enabling you to scroll through the jobs.
Change Language
Launch the Change Language pop‑up window that lets you change the
primary language of the printer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the home screen
18
Features
Feature
Description
Menu trail line
A menu trail line is located at the top of each menu screen. This feature shows the
path taken to arrive at the current menu.
Sample: Menus > Settings > Copy
Settings > Number of Copies
Touch any of the underlined words to return to that menu.
Number of Copies is not underlined since this is the current screen. If you touch an
underlined word on the Number of Copies screen before the Number of Copies is
set and saved, then the selection is not saved, and it does not become the default
setting.
Attendance message alert
Warning
If an attendance message affects a function, then this icon appears and the red
indicator light blinks.
If an error condition occurs, then this icon appears.
Printer IP address
The IP address of your network printer is located at the top left corner of the home
screen and appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods. You can use the
IP address when accessing the Embedded Web Server so you can view and remotely
configure printer settings even when you are not physically near the printer.
Sample: 123.123.123.123
Using the touch-screen buttons
Note: Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings,
administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.
Touch
To
Copy It
Submit changes made in the copy settings and start the copy job.
Scroll to the right.
Right arrow
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the home screen
19
Touch
To
Left arrow
Scroll to the left.
Home
Return to the home screen.
Select a higher value.
Right increase
Left decrease
Exit
Select a lower value.
Exit from the current screen.
Open a context-sensitive help dialog.
Tips
Other touch-screen buttons
Touch
To
Accept
Save a setting.
Cancel
Reset
• Cancel an action or a selection.
• Exit a screen and return to the previous screen without saving changes.
Reset values on the screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up and using the home screen applications
20
Setting up and using the home screen applications
Notes:
• Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary depending on your home screen customization settings,
administrative setup, and active embedded applications. Some applications are supported only in select printer
models.
• There may be additional solutions and applications available for purchase. To learn more, visit
www.lexmark.com. Or, inquire at your point of purchase.
Accessing the Embedded Web Server
The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings even
when you are not physically near the printer.
1 Obtain the printer IP address:
• From the printer control panel home screen
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
The Embedded Web Server page appears.
Showing or hiding icons on the home screen
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Home screen customization.
A list of basic printer functions appears.
3 Select the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the printer home screen.
Note: Cleared check box items are hidden.
4 Click Submit.
The selected icons appear on the home screen. For information about each of these icons, see “Understanding the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up and using the home screen applications
21
Activating the home screen applications
Your printer comes with preinstalled home screen applications. To use these applications, activate and set up these
applications using the Embedded Web Server. For more information about accessing the Embedded Web Server, see
For detailed information about configuring and using the home screen applications, visit the Lexmark Web site at
Setting up Forms and Favorites
Icon
Description
The application helps you simplify and streamline work processes by letting you quickly find and print
frequently used online forms directly from the home screen.
Note: The printer must have permission to access the network folder, FTP site, or Web site where the
bookmark is stored. From the computer where the bookmark is stored, use sharing, security, and
firewall settings to allow the printer at least a read access. For help, see the documentation that came
with your operating system.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen. The IP address appears as four sets
of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Click Settings > Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF) > Forms and Favorites.
3 Define the bookmarks, and then customize the settings.
4 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Forms and Favorites on the printer home screen, and then navigate through form
categories, or search for forms based on a form number, name, or description.
Setting up Scan to Network
Icon
Description
The application letsyou capture a digital imageof a hard‑copy document and routeit to a shared network
folder. You can define up to 30 unique folder destinations.
Notes:
• The printer must have permission to write to the destinations. From the computer where the
destination is specified, use sharing, security, and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a
write access. For help, see the documentation that came with your operating system.
• The Scan to Network icon appears only when one or more destinations are defined.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up and using the home screen applications
22
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen. The IP address appears as four sets
of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Click Settings > Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF) > Scan to Network.
3 Specify the destinations, and then customize the settings.
4 Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Scan to Network on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions on the
printer display.
Setting up My MFP
Icon
Description
The application lets you customize your touch‑screen settings and store those preferences in a flash
drive. Each time you want to copy, fax, or scan, insert the flash drive into the USB port of the printer. All
your personal preferences are automatically uploaded, including job settings, home screen preferences,
and address book.
Note: The icon appears only when a flash drive with My MFP settings is inserted into the USB port of
the printer.
To set up My MFP, insert a flash drive into the USB port of the printer, and then follow the instructions on the printer
display to run the setup wizard.
To use My MFP, insert the flash drive into the USB port of the printer when you want to copy, fax, or scan.
Understanding WS‑Scan
Icon
Description
The Web Services‑Scan application lets you scan documents at the network printer, and then send the
scanned image to your computer. WS‑Scan is a Microsoft application that is similar to Scan to Network,
but has the capability of sending the scanned image to a Windows‑based application. To learn more
about WS‑Scan, see the Microsoft documentation.
Note: The icon appears on the printer home screen only when there is a computer registered with the
network printer. The computer must have either Windows 7 or Windows Vista operating system
installed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up and using the home screen applications
23
Setting up Remote Operator Panel
This application shows the printer control panel on your computer screen and lets you interact with the printer control
panel, even when you are not physically near the network printer. From your computer screen, you can view the printer
status, release held print jobs, create bookmarks, and do other print-related tasks you might normally do while standing
at the network printer.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen. The IP address appears as four sets
of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Click Settings > Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF) > Remote Operator Panel.
3 Select the Enabled check box, and then customize the settings.
4 Click Apply.
To use the application, from the Embedded Web Server, click Applications > Remote Operator Panel > Launch VNC
Applet.
Exporting and importing a configuration
You can export configuration settings into a text file, and then import it to apply the settings to other printers.
Exporting a configuration to a file
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen. The IP address appears as four sets
of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Click Settings or Configuration.
3 Click Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF), or click Embedded Solutions.
4 From Installed Solutions, click the name of the application you want to configure.
5 Click Configure > Export.
6 Follow the instructions on the computer screen to save the configuration file, and then type a unique file name or
use the default name.
Note: If a JVM Out of Memoryerror occurs, then repeat the export process until the configuration file is
saved.
Importing a configuration from a file
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer control panel home screen. The IP address appears as four sets
of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2 Click Settings or Configuration.
3 Click Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF), or click Embedded Solutions.
4 From Installed Solutions, click the name of the application you want to configure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting up and using the home screen applications
24
5 Click Configure > Import.
6 Browse to the saved configuration file that was exported from a previously configured printer, and then load or
preview it.
Note: If a timeout occurs and a blank screen appears, then refresh the Web browser, and then click Apply.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
25
Additional printer setup
Installing internal options
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and
unplug any cables going into the printer.
Available internal options
• Memory cards
– Printer memory
– Flash memory
– Fonts
• Firmware cards
– Bar Code
– IPDS
– PrintCryptionTM
• Printer hard disk
• LexmarkTM Internal Solutions Ports (ISP)
– RS‑232‑C Serial ISP
– Parallel 1284‑B ISP
– MarkNetTM N8250 802.11 b/g/n Wireless ISP
– MarkNet N8130 10/100 Fiber ISP
– MarkNet N8120 10/100/1000 Ethernet ISP
Note: An external kit is needed to support the ISP.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
26
Accessing the system board
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
1 Remove the system board cover.
a Turn the screws on the cover counterclockwise to loosen them, but do not remove them.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
27
b Slide the cover slightly up until each screw is in the keyhole.
c Pull the cover to remove it.
2 Locate the appropriate connector on the system board.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
28
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
Fax card connector
Firmware and flash memory card connectors
Printer hard disk connector
Internal print server connector
Memory card connector
3 Reattach the system board cover.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
29
a Align the keyholes with the screws.
b Slide the cover down, and then turn each screw on the cover clockwise to tighten.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
30
Installing a memory card
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
An optional memory card can be purchased separately and attached to the system board.
1 Access the system board.
For more information, see “Accessing the system board” on page 26.
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
2 Unpack the memory card.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the connection points along the edge of the card. Doing so may
cause damage.
3 Open the memory card connector latches.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
31
4 Align the notch (1) on the memory card with the ridge (2) on the connector.
2
1
5 Push the memory card straight into the connector until it clicks into place, and then push the latches to firmly attach
the card into the connector.
2
1
2
6 Reattach the system board cover.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
32
Installing a flash memory or firmware card
The system board has two connections for an optional flash memory orfirmware card. Only one ofeach may be installed,
but the connectors are interchangeable.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and
unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
1 Access the system board.
For more information, see“Accessing the system board” on page 26.
2 Unpack the card.
Warning—Potential Damage: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.
3 Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins (1) on the card with the holes (2) on the system board.
1
2
4 Push the card firmly into place.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to damage the connectors.
Note: The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flush against the system board.
5 Reattach the system board cover.
Note: When the printer software and any options are installed, it may be necessary to manually add the options
in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see “Updating available
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
33
Installing an Internal Solutions Port
The system board supports one optional Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP).
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1 Access the system board.
For more information, see “Accessing the system board” on page 26.
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
2 Unpack the ISP kit.
1
4
3
2
1
2
3
4
ISP solution
Screws for the ISP solution
Screw for the plastic bracket
Plastic bracket
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
34
3 Locate the appropriate holes on the system board where the posts of the plastic tee will be aligned.
Note: If an optional printer hard disk is currently installed, then remove it first. For more information, see
4 Remove the screws, and then remove the metal cover from the ISP opening.
1
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
35
5 Attach the ISP solution to the system board.
a Align the posts of the plastic tee to the holes on the system board.
b Hold the edges of the ISP and guide it to the opening on the system board cage, and then gently allow it to rest
on the plastic tee.
c Use the provided screw to attach the plastic bracket to the ISP solution.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
36
6 Connect the ISP solution interface cable into the color‑coded receptacle on the system board.
7 Firmly connect the ISP solution to the system board cage using the two screws.
8 Reattach the system board cover.
Note: If you have removed an optional printer hard disk while installing the Internal Solutions Port, then
reinstall the printer hard disk first before reattaching the system board cover. For more information, see
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
37
Installing a printer hard disk
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1 Access the system board.
For more information, see “Accessing the system board” on page 26.
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
2 Unpack the printer hard disk.
3 Locate the appropriate holes on the system board where the posts of the plastic tee will be aligned.
Note: If an optional ISP is currently installed, then the printer hard disk must be installed onto the ISP.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
38
To install a printer hard disk onto the ISP:
a Using a flathead screwdriver, loosen the screws.
b Remove the screws attached to the printer hard disk mounting bracket, and then remove the bracket.
c Install the printer hard disk onto the ISP:
1 Hold the edges of the printed circuit board assembly, and then align the standoffs of the printer hard disk
to the holes in the ISP.
2 Press down on the printer hard disk until the standoffs are in place.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not press on the center of the printer hard disk. Doing so may cause damage to
the hard disk.
d Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the ISP.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color‑coded.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
39
To install a printer hard disk directly on the system board:
a Hold the edges of the printed circuit board assembly, and then align the standoffs of the printer hard disk to
the holes in the system board. Press down on the printer hard disk until the standoffs are in place.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not press on the center of the printer hard disk. Doing so may cause
damage to the hard disk.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
40
b Use the two provided screws to attach the printer hard disk mounting bracket.
c Insert the plug of the printer hard disk interface cable into the receptacle of the system board.
Note: The plugs and receptacles are color‑coded.
4 Reattach the system board cover.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
41
Removing a printer hard disk
Warning—Potential Damage: System board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity. Touch
something metal on the printer before touching any system board electronic components or connectors.
1 Access the system board.
For more information, see “Accessing the system board” on page 26.
Note: This task requires a flathead screwdriver.
2 Unplug the printer hard disk interface cable from the system board, leaving the cable attached to the printer hard
disk. To unplug the cable, squeeze the paddle at the plug of the interface cable to disengage the latch before pulling
the cable out.
3 Remove the screws that connect the printer hard disk to the system board cage.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
42
4 Remove the printer hard disk by pulling it upward to unseat the standoffs.
5 Set the printer hard disk aside.
6 Reattach the system board cover.
Installing hardware options
Order of installation
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb), and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high-capacity input tray, a duplex unit and an input
option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and
faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Install the printer and any optional drawers in the following order:
• Optional 2,000‑sheet high‑capacity feeder
• Optional 550-sheet drawer
• Optional 550-sheet specialty media drawer
• Printer
For information on installing an optional drawer, see the setup documentation that came with the option.
Warning—Potential Damage: The trays in the optional 550-sheet drawer and the optional 550-sheet specialty media
drawer are not interchangeable.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
43
Installing optional drawers
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the system board or installing optional hardware or memory
devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the
wall outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well,
and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using a high-capacity input tray, a duplex unit and an input
option, or more than one input option. If you purchased a multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and
faxes, you may need additional furniture. For more information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
1 Unpack the optional drawer, and then remove all packing material.
Note: Optional drawers lock together when stacked. Remove stacked drawers one at a time from the top to the
bottom.
2 Place the drawer near the printer.
3 Turn off the printer.
4 Align the printer with the drawer, and then lower the printer into place.
Note: A caster base and up to four spacers are supported in any printer configuration. For information on
installing the caster base and spacer, see the instruction sheet that came with the option.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
44
1
2
3
1
2
Optional 550‑sheet specialty media drawer
Optional 550‑sheet drawer
Note: This drawer is standard in the X748dte printer model.
3
Optional 2000‑sheet drawer
5 Turn the printer back on.
Attaching cables
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or
make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone during a lightning
storm.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
45
1 Open the access door by pulling it out to the right.
2 Match the appropriate cable to the corresponding port.
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
Fax port
Telephone port
Ethernet port
USB printer port
USB port
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any network adapter, or the printer in the area
shown while actively printing. A loss of data or a malfunction can occur.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
46
3 Close the access door, and then neatly align the cable to the left.
Note: You may choose to completely remove the access door and store it.
Setting up the printer software
Installing the printer software
Note: If you installed the printer software on the computer before but need to reinstall the software, then uninstall
the current software first.
For Windows users
1 Close all open software programs.
2 Insert the Software and Documentation CD.
If the installation dialog screen does not appear after a minute, then launch the CD manually:
a Click
, or click Start and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe, where Dis the letter of your CD or DVD drive.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
3 Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
For Macintosh users
1 Close all open applications.
2 Insert the Software and Documentation CD.
If the installation dialog does not appear after a minute, then click the CD icon on the desktop.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
47
3 Double-click the software installer package, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Note: To take advantage of the full features of your printer, select the custom install option, and then select all
packages listed.
Using the Internet
2 Navigate to:
SUPPORT & DOWNLOADS > select your printer > select your operating system
3 Download the printer driver, and then install the printer software.
Updating available options in the printer driver
When the printer software and any options are installed, it may be necessary to manually add the options in the printer
driver to make them available for print jobs.
For Windows users
1 Open the printers folder:
a Click
, or click Start and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
2 Select the printer.
3 Right‑click the printer, and then select Properties.
4 Click the Configuration tab.
5 Click Update Now ‑ Ask Printer or manually add any installed hardware options under Configuration Options.
6 Click Apply.
For Macintosh users
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later
1 From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Print & Fax > select your printer > Options & Supplies > Driver
2 Add any installed hardware options, and then click OK.
In Mac OS X version 10.4
1 From the Finder, navigate to:
Go > Applications > Utilities
2 Double‑click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
3 Select the printer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
48
4 From the Printers menu, choose Show Info.
5 Add any installed hardware options, and then click Apply Changes.
Networking
Note: A Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name assigned to a wireless network. Wireless Encryption Protocol (WEP)
and Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) are types of security used on a network.
Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network
Note: Do not connect the installation or network cables until prompted to do so by the setup software.
Make sure you have the following information before setting up the printer on a wireless network:
• SSID—The SSID is also referred to as the network name.
• Wireless Mode (or Network Mode)—The mode will be either infrastructure or ad hoc.
• Channel (for ad hoc networks)—The channel defaults to automatic for infrastructure networks.
Some ad hoc networks will also require the automatic setting. Check with your system support person if you are
not sure which channel to select.
• Security Method—There are three basic options for Security Method:
– WEP key
If your network uses more than one WEP key, then enter up to four in the provided spaces. Select the key
currently in use on the network by selecting the default WEP transmit key.
or
– WPA or WPA2 preshared key or passphrase
WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security. The choices are AES or TKIP. Encryption must be set
for the same type on the router and on the printer, or the printer will not be able to communicate on the
network.
– No security
If your wireless network does not use any type of security, then you will not have any security information.
Note: Using an unsecured wireless network is not recommended.
If you are installing the printer on an 802.1X network using the advanced method, then you may need the following:
• Authentication type
• Inner authentication type
• 802.1X user name and password
• Certificates
Note: For more information on configuring 802.1X security, see the Networking Guide on the Software and
Documentation CD.
Installing the printer on a wireless network (Windows)
Before installing the printer on a wireless network, make sure:
• Your wireless network is set up and working properly.
• The computer you are using is connected to the same wireless network where you want to set up the printer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
49
1 Connect the power cable to the printer and then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn the printer
on.
1
2
Make sure the printer and computer are fully on and ready.
Do not connect the USB cable until instructed to do so on the computer screen.
2 Insert the Software and Documentation CD.
3 Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
4 Select Wireless connection when asked to choose a connection type.
5 From the Wireless Configuration dialog, select Guided Setup (Recommended).
Note: Choose Advanced Setup only if you want to customize your installation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
50
6 Temporarily connect a USB cable between the computer on the wireless network and the printer.
Note: After the printer is configured, the software will instruct you to disconnect the temporary USB cable so
you can print wirelessly.
7 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Note: For more information on allowing other computers on the network to use the wireless printer, see the
Networking Guide.
Installing the printer on a wireless network (Macintosh)
Note: Make sure to disconnect the Ethernet cable when installing the printer on a wireless network.
Prepare to configure the printer
1 Connect the power cable to the printer and then to a properly grounded electrical outlet, and then turn the printer
on.
1
2
2 Locate the printer MAC address.
a From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Reports >
> Network Setup Page >
or
> Reports > Network Setup Page
b In the Standard Network Card section, look for UAA (MAC).
Note: You will need this information later.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
51
Enter the printer information
1 Access the AirPort options:
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later
From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Network > AirPort
In Mac OS X version 10.4
From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Internet Connect > AirPort
2 From the Network Name pop‑up menu, select print server [yyyyyy], where the y's are the last six digits of the MAC
address located on the MAC address sheet.
3 Open a Web browser.
4 From the Bookmarks menu, select Show or Show All Bookmarks.
5 Under COLLECTIONS, select Bonjour or Rendezvous, and then double‑click the printer name.
Note: The application referred to as Rendezvous in Mac OS X version 10.2 is now called Bonjour by Apple Inc.
6 From the Embedded Web Server, navigate to where the wireless settings information are stored.
Configure the printer for wireless access
1 Type the network name (SSID) in the appropriate field.
2 Select Infrastructure as your Network Mode setting if you are using an access point (wireless router).
3 Select the type of security you want to use to protect the wireless network.
4 Enter the security information necessary for the printer to connect to the wireless network.
5 Click Submit.
6 Open the AirPort application on the computer:
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later
From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Network > AirPort
In Mac OS X version 10.4
From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Internet Connect > AirPort
7 From the Network pop‑up menu, select the name of the wireless network.
Configure your computer to use the printer wirelessly
To print on a network printer, each Macintosh user must install a custom printer driver file and create a print queue in
the Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
1 Install a printer driver file on the computer:
a Insert the Software and Documentation CD, and then double‑click the installer package for the printer.
b Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
52
c Select a destination, and then click Continue.
d From the Easy Install screen, click Install.
e Type the user password, and then click OK.
All necessary applications are installed in the computer.
f Click Close when installation is complete.
2 Add the printer:
a For IP printing:
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later
1 From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Print & Fax
2 Click +, and then click the IP tab.
3 Type the IP address of the printer in the address field, and then click Add.
In Mac OS X version 10.4
1 From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Utilities
2 Double‑click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
3 From the Printer List, choose Add, and then click IP Printer.
4 Type the IP address of the printer in the address field, and then click Add.
b For AppleTalk printing:
Note: Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.
In Mac OS X version 10.5
1 From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Print & Fax
2 Click +, and then navigate to:
AppleTalk > select the printer from the list > Add
In Mac OS X version 10.4
1 From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Utilities
2 Double‑click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
3 From the Printer List, click Add.
4 Click Default Browser tab > More Printers.
5 From the first pop‑up menu, select AppleTalk.
6 From the second pop‑up menu, select Local AppleTalk Zone.
7 Select the printer from the list, and then click Add.
Installing the printer on a wired network
These instructions apply to Ethernet and fiber optic network connections.
Note: Make sure you have completed the initial setup of the printer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
53
For Windows users
1 Insert the Software and Documentation CD.
If the installation screen does not appear after a minute, then launch the CD manually:
a Click
, or click Start and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type D:\setup.exe, where Dis the letter of the CD or DVD drive.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
2 Click Install, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Note: To configure the printer using a static IP address, IPv6, or scripts, select Advanced Options >
Administrator Tools.
3 Select Ethernet connection, and then click Continue.
4 Attach the appropriate cable to the computer and to the printer when instructed to do so.
5 Select the printer from the list, and then click Continue.
Note: If the configured printer does not appear on the list, then click Modify Search.
6 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
For Macintosh users
1 Allow the network DHCP server to assign an IP address to the printer.
2 Obtain the printer IP address:
• From the printer home screen
• From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
• By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: You will need the IP address if you are configuring access for computers on a different subnet than the printer.
3 Install the printer drivers, and then add the printer.
a Install a printer driver file on the computer:
1 Insert the Software and Documentation CD, and then double‑click the installer package for the printer.
2 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
3 Select a destination, and then click Continue.
4 From the Easy Install screen, click Install.
5 Type the user password, and then click OK.
All the necessary applications are installed in the computer.
6 Click Close when installation is complete.
b Add the printer:
• For IP printing:
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later
1 From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Print & Fax
2 Click +, and then click the IP tab.
3 Type the printer IP address in the address field, and then click Add.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
54
In Mac OS X version 10.4
1 From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Utilities
2 Double‑click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
3 From the Printer List, click Add, and then click IP Printer.
4 Type in the printer IP address in the address field, and then click Add.
• For AppleTalk printing:
Note: Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.
In Mac OS X version 10.5
1 From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Print & Fax
2 Click +, and then navigate to:
AppleTalk > select the printer from the list > Add
In Mac OS X version 10.4
1 From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Utilities
2 Double‑click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
3 From the Printer List, click Add.
4 Click Default Browser tab > More Printers.
5 From the first pop‑up menu, select AppleTalk.
6 From the second pop‑up menu, select Local AppleTalk Zone.
7 Select the printer from the list, and then click Add.
Note: If the printer does not show up in the list, then you may need to add it using the IP address. For more
information, contact your system support person.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
55
Changing port settings after installing a new network Internal Solutions Port
When a new Lexmark Internal Solutions Port (ISP) is installed in the printer, the printer configurations on computers
that access the printer must be updated since the printer will be assigned a new IP address. All computers that access
the printer must be updated with this new IP address.
Notes:
• If the printer has a static IP address, then you do not need to make any changes to the computer configurations.
• If the computers are configured to use network name that will stay the same, instead of by IP address, then you
do not need to make any changes to your computer configurations.
• If you are adding a wireless ISP to a printer previously configured for a wired connection, then make sure the
wired network is disconnected when you configure the printer to operate wirelessly. If the wired connection
remains connected, then the wireless configuration will complete, but the wireless ISP will not be active. In the
event that the printer was configured for a wireless ISP while still attached to a wired connection, disconnect
the wired connection, turn the printer off, and then turn the printer back on again. This will enable the wireless
ISP.
• Only one network connection at a time is active. If you want to switch the connection type between wired and
wireless, you must first turn the printer off, connect the cable (to switch to a wired connection) or disconnect
the cable (to switch to a wireless connection), and then turn the printer on.
For Windows users
1 Click
, or click Start and then click Run.
2 In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
3 Press Enter, or click OK.
The printer folder opens.
4 Locate the printer that has changed.
Note: If there is more than one copy of the printer, then update all of them with the new IP address.
5 Right‑click the printer.
6 Click Properties > Ports tab.
7 Select the port from the list, and then click Configure Port.
8 Type the new IP address in the “Printer Name or IP Address” field.
Note: View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Reports menu. The IP address appears as
four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
9 Click OK > Close.
For Macintosh users
Add the printer:
• For IP printing:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
56
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later
1 From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Print & Fax
2 Click +, and then click the IP tab.
3 Type the printer IP address in the address field, and then click Add.
Note: View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Reports menu. The IP address
appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
In Mac OS X version 10.4
1 From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Utilities
2 Double‑click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
3 From the Printer List, click Add, and then click IP Printer.
4 Type the printer IP address in the address field, and then click Add.
Note: View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Reports menu. The IP address
appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• For AppleTalk printing:
Note: Make sure AppleTalk is activated on your printer.
In Mac OS X version 10.5
1 From the Apple menu, navigate to:
System Preferences > Print & Fax
2 Click +, and then navigate to:
AppleTalk > select the printer from the list > Add
In Mac OS X version 10.4
1 From the Finder, navigate to:
Applications > Utilities
2 Double‑click Printer Setup Utility or Print Center.
3 From the Printer List, click Add.
4 Click the Default Browser tab > More Printers.
5 From the first pop‑up menu, select AppleTalk.
6 From the second pop‑up menu, select Local AppleTalk Zone.
7 Select the printer from the list, and then click Add.
Setting up serial printing
In serial printing, data is transferred one bit at a time. Although serial printing is usually slower than parallel printing,
it is the preferred option when there is a great deal of distance between the printer and computer or when an interface
with a better transfer rate is not available.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
57
After installing the serial or communication (COM) port, configure the printer and the computer so they can
communicate. Make sure you have connected the serial cable to the COM port on your printer.
1 Set the parameters in the printer:
a From the printer control panel, navigate to the menu with port settings.
b Locate the menu with serial port settings.
c Make any necessary changes to the serial settings.
d Save the new settings, and then print a menu settings page.
2 Install the printer driver:
a Insert the Software and Documentation CD.
If the installation screen does not appear after a minute, then launch the CD manually::
1 Click
, or click Start and then click Run.
2 In the Start Search or Run box, type D:\setup.exe, where Dis the letter of the CD or DVD drive.
3 Press Enter, or click OK.
b Click Advanced Options > Custom Install.
c Follow the instructions on the computer screen
d From the Configure Printer Connection dialog, select Connect through a port discovered on your computer,
and then select a port.
e If the port is not in the list, then click Refresh.
or
Navigate to:
Add port > select a port type > enter necessary information > OK
f Click Continue.
1 If you want to add another printer, then click Add Another.
2 If you want to make changes, then select a printer, and then click Edit.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
g Click Finish.
3 Set the COM port parameters:
After installing the printer driver, set the serial parameters in the COM port assigned to the printer driver.
Note: Make sure the serial parameters in the COM port match the serial parameters you set in the printer.
a Open the Device Manager.
1 Click
, or click Start and then click Run.
2 In the Start Search or Run box, type devmgmt.msc.
3 Press Enter, or click OK.
b Look for Ports, and then click + to expand the list of available ports.
c Right‑click the COM port where you attached the serial cable to your computer (example: COM1).
d Click Properties.
e On the Port Settings tab, set the serial parameters to the same serial parameters in the printer.
Check the serial heading of the menu settings page for the printer settings.
f Click OK, and then close all the windows.
g Print a test page to verify printer installation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional printer setup
58
Verifying printer setup
When all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on, verify that the printer is set up
correctly by printing the following:
• Menu settings page—Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly. A list of installed options
appears toward the bottom of the page. If an option you installed is not listed, then it is not installed correctly.
Remove the option and install it again.
• Network setup page—If your printer is a network model and is attached to a network, print a network setup page
to verify the network connection. This page also provides important information that aids network printing
configuration.
Printing a menu settings page
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Menu Settings Page
Printing a network setup page
If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page
also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Network Setup Page
2 Check the first section of the network setup page, and confirm that the status is Connected.
If the status is Not Connected, thenthe LANdrop may not be active, orthe network cable may be malfunctioning.
Consult a system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading paper and specialty media
59
Loading paper and specialty media
The selection and handling of paper and specialty media can affect how reliably documents print. For more information,
Setting the paper size and type
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Paper Size/Type > select a tray > select the paper size or type > Submit
Notes:
• The Paper Size setting is automatically set according to the position of the paper guides in each tray except the
standard 550‑sheet tray (Tray 1) and the multipurpose feeder.
• The Paper Size setting for Tray 1 and the multipurpose feeder must be set manually in the Paper Size menu.
• The factory default Paper Type setting is Plain Paper.
• The Paper Type setting must be set manually for all trays.
Configuring Universal paper settings
The Universal Paper Size is a user‑defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer
menus. Set the Paper Size for the specified tray to Universal when the size you want is not available from the Paper
Size menu. Then, specify all of the following Universal size settings for your paper:
• Units of Measure
• Portrait Width
• Portrait Height
Note: The smallest supported Universal size is 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.); the largest size is 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Universal Setup > Units of Measure > select a unit of measure
2 Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height > select the width or height > Submit.
Loading the standard or optional 550‑sheet tray
The printer has one standard 550‑sheet tray (Tray 1) and may have up to four optional 550‑sheet trays including the
special media tray. For narrow paper sizes such as A6 and envelopes, use the special media tray. For more information,
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each paper drawer or tray
separately. Keep all other trays closed until needed.
1 Pull the tray completely out.
Note: Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busyappears on the display. Doing so may cause a jam.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading paper and specialty media
60
2 Squeeze and slide the width guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.
Note: Use the paper size indicators at the bottom of the tray to help position the length and width guides.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading paper and specialty media
61
3 Squeeze and slide the length guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.
Notes:
• For some paper sizes like letter, legal, and A4, squeeze and slide the length guide backward to accommodate
their length.
• The length guide has a locking device. To unlock the length guide, slide to the left the button on top of the
length guide. To lock, slide the button to the right when a length has been selected.
1
2
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading paper and specialty media
62
4 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level
surface.
5 Load the paper stack toward the back of the tray with the recommended printable side faceup.
Notes:
• When loading preprinted letterhead for one‑sided printing, place the header faceup toward the front of the
tray.
• When loading preprinted letterhead for two‑sided printing, place the header facedown toward the rear of
the tray.
One‑sided printing
Two‑sided (Duplex) printing
L E T T E R H E A D
L E T T E R H E A D
Note: Make sure paper does not exceed the maximum paper fill indicator located on the left side of the tray.
Warning—Potential Damage: Overloading the tray can cause paper jams and possible printer damage.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading paper and specialty media
63
6 Insert the tray.
7 From the printer control panel, verify the paper size and paper type setting for the tray based on the paper you
loaded.
Loading the optional 550‑sheet special media tray
The optional 550‑sheet special media tray (Tray 2) supports narrow paper sizes such as envelopes and A6.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading paper and specialty media
64
2
1
3
4
1
2
3
4
Primary length guide
Length guide lock
Secondary length guide
Width guide
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each paper drawer or tray
separately. Keep all other trays closed until needed.
Notes:
• For instructions on loading paper sizes larger than A6 and envelopes, see “Loading the standard or optional
• For a complete list of supported paper sizes, see the "Supported paper sizes, types, and weights" section in the
User's Guide.
Loading narrow paper sizes such as envelopes and A6
1 Pull the tray completely out.
Note: Do not remove trays while a job prints or while Busyappears on the display. Doing so may cause a jam.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading paper and specialty media
65
2 Squeeze and slide the primary length guide toward you until it stops.
Notes:
• The length has a locking device. To unlock the length guide, slide to the left the button on top of the length
guide. To lock, slide the button to the right when a length has been selected.
• You can only slide the secondary length guide when the primary length guide reaches the edge of the width
guide.
1
2
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading paper and specialty media
66
3 Squeeze and slide the width guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.
1
2
Note: Use the paper size indicators at the bottom of the tray to help position the width guide.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading paper and specialty media
67
4 Squeeze and slide the secondary length guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.
1
2
5 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level
surface.
6 Load the paper stack with the recommended printable side faceup.
Notes:
• Load envelopes with the stamp side entering the printer first.
• Make sure the paper does not exceed the maximum paper fill indicator located on the side of the width
guide.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading paper and specialty media
68
Warning—Potential Damage: Overloading the tray can cause paper jams and possible printer damage.
7 Insert the tray.
8 From the printer control panel, verify the paper size and paper type setting for the tray based on the paper you
loaded.
Note: Return the secondary length guide to its original position when loading long papers such as legal, letter, and
A4. Squeeze and slide the guide until it clicks into place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading paper and specialty media
69
Loading the 2,000‑sheet high‑capacity feeder
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each paper tray separately.
Keep all other trays closed until needed.
1 Pull the tray out.
2 Pull up and slide the width guide to the correct position for the paper size you are loading.
3 Unlock the length guide.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading paper and specialty media
70
4 Push the length guide release latch to raise the length guide. Slide the guide to the correct position for the paper
size you are loading, and then lock the guide.
5 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level
surface.
6 Load the paper stack:
• Printable side faceup for one‑sided printing
• Printable side facedown for two‑sided printing
One‑sided printing
Two‑sided printing
L
E
T
T
E
R
H
E
A
D
L
E
T
T
E
R
H
E
A
D
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading paper and specialty media
71
• Make sure paper does not exceed the maximum paper fill indicator located on the side of the tray.
Warning—Potential Damage: Overloading the tray may cause paper jams and possible printer damage.
7 Insert the tray.
Loading the multipurpose feeder
The multipurpose feeder can hold approximately:
• 100 sheets of 75‑g/m2 (20‑lb) paper
• 10 envelopes
• 75 transparencies
Note: Do not add or remove paper or specialty media while the printer prints from the multipurpose feeder or when
the printer control panel indicator light is blinking. Doing so may cause a jam.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading paper and specialty media
72
6
L
T
E
XEC
B
5
A
5
5
4
1
3
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
Maximum paper fill indicator
Tray release latch
Paper release lever
Paper size indicators
Paper width guide
Width guide release tab
1 Press the tray release latch to the left, and then pull the multipurpose feeder down.
2 Gently pull the extension out until it is fully extended.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading paper and specialty media
73
3 Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a level
surface.
Paper
Envelopes
Transparencies*
* Avoid touching the printable side of transparencies. Be careful
not to scratch them.
4 Load the paper or specialty media. Slide the stack into the multipurpose feeder until it comes to a stop.
Notes:
• Make sure paper or specialty media does not exceed the maximum paper fill indicator.
• Load only one size and type of paper or specialty media at a time.
• Paper or specialty media should lie flat and fit loosely in the multipurpose feeder.
• If the paper or specialty media is pushed too far into the multipurpose feeder, then press the paper release
lever to remove it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading paper and specialty media
74
• Load envelopes with the flap on the right side up and the stamp edge entering the printer first.
Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, or
self‑stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.
5 From the printer control panel, verify the paper size and paper type setting for the feeder based on the paper you
loaded.
Linking and unlinking trays
When the paper size and paper type for any trays are the same, the printer will link those trays. When one linked tray
becomes empty, paper will feed from the next linked tray. It is recommended to give all unique paper, such as letterhead
and different colored plain papers, a different custom type name so that the trays they are in will not automatically
link.
Unlinking trays
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu.
3 Change the paper size and type settings of the tray so that they do not match the settings of any other tray, and
then click Submit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Paper loaded in the tray should match the paper type name assigned in the printer.
The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified paper type. Printing issues may occur if settings are
not properly configured.
Linking trays
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading paper and specialty media
75
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu.
3 Change the paper type and size settings of the tray so that they match the settings of any other tray, and then click
Submit.
Creating a custom name for a paper type
If the printer is on a network, then use the Embedded Web Server to define a name other than Custom Type [x] for
each of the custom paper types loaded into the printer.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Navigate to:
Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Name > type a name > Submit
Note: The custom name will replace Custom Type [x] under the Custom Types and Paper Size and Type menus.
3 Navigate to:
Custom Types > select a paper type > Submit
Assigning a custom paper type name
Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Names.
3 Type a name for the paper type, and then click Submit.
4 Select a custom type, and then verify that the correct paper type is associated with the custom name.
Note: Plain Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.
Configuring a custom name
If the printer is on a network, then you can use the Embedded Web Server to define a name other than Custom Type [x]
for each of the custom paper types loaded into the printer.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading paper and specialty media
76
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types.
3 Select a custom name you want to configure, select a paper or specialty media type, and then click Submit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Paper and specialty media guidelines
77
Paper and specialty media guidelines
Paper guidelines
Paper characteristics
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Consider these characteristics when evaluating
new paper stock.
Weight
The printer can automatically feed paper weights from 60 to 220 g/m2 (16 to 58 lb bond) grain long. Paper lighter than
60 g/m2 (16 lb) might not be stiff enough to feed properly, causing jams. For best performance, use 75 g/m2 (20 lb
bond) grain long paper. For paper smaller than 182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 in.), we recommend 90 g/m2 (24 lb) or heavier
paper.
Note: Duplex is supported only for 63 g/m2–170 g/m2 (17 lb–45 lb bond) paper.
Curl
Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can occur after
the paper passes through the printer, where it isexposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in hot, humid,
cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding
problems.
Smoothness
Paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If paper is too rough, toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper is too
smooth, it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield points;
however, smoothness between 150 and 200 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.
Moisture content
The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly.
Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that
can degrade its performance.
Condition paper before printing by storing it in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to
48 hours before printing. Extend the time several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different
from the printer environment. Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period.
Grain direction
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of
the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper.
For 60 to 135 g/m2 (16 to 36 lb bond) paper, grain long paper is recommended. For papers heavier than 135 g/m2, grain
short is recommended.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Paper and specialty media guidelines
78
Fiber content
Most high‑quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides the
paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problemsand better print quality. Paper containing
fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling.
Unacceptable paper
The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:
• Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers, carbonless
copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper
• Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
• Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser
• Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than ±2.3 mm (±0.9 in.),
such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms
In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms.
• Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
• Rough‑edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers, or curled papers
• Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European)
• Paper weighing less than 60 g/m2 (16 lb)
• Multiple‑part forms or documents
Selecting paper
Using the appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble‑free printing.
To help avoid paper jams and poor print quality:
• Always use new, undamaged paper.
• Before loading paper, know the recommended printable side of the paper. This information is usually indicated on
the paper package.
• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
• Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same tray; mixing results in jams.
• Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead
Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead:
• Use grain long for 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb) weight paper.
• Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.
• Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
Use papers printed with heat‑resistant inks designed for use in xerographic copiers. The ink must be able to withstand
temperatures up to 190°C (374°F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions. Use inks that are not affected by
the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation‑set or oil‑based generally meet these requirements; latex inks might not.
When in doubt, contact the paper supplier.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Paper and specialty media guidelines
79
Preprinted papers such as letterhead must be able to withstand temperatures up to 190°C (374°F) without melting or
releasing hazardous emissions.
Using recycled paper and other office papers
As an environmentally conscientious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled paper produced specifically for
use in laser (electrophotographic) printers.
While no blanket statement can be made that all recycled paper will feed well, Lexmark consistently tests papers that
represent recycled cut size copier papers available on the global market. This scientific testing is conducted with rigor
and discipline. Many factors are taken into consideration both separately and as a whole, including the following:
• Amount of post-consumer waste (Lexmark tests up to 100% post-consumer waste content.)
• Temperature and humidity conditions (Testing chambers simulate climates from all over the world.)
• Moisture content (Business papers should have low moisture: 4–5%.)
• Bending resistance and proper stiffness means optimum feeding through the printer.
• Thickness (impacts how much can be loaded into a tray)
• Surface roughness (measured in Sheffield units, impacts print clarity and how well toner fuses to the paper)
• Surface friction (determines how easily sheets can be separated)
• Grain and formation (impacts curling, which also influences the mechanics of how the paper behaves as it moves
through the printer)
• Brightness and texture (look and feel)
Recycled papers are better than ever; however, the amount of recycled content in a paper affects the degree of control
over foreign matter. And while recycled papers are one good path to printing in an environmentally responsible manner,
they are not perfect. The energy required to de-ink and deal with additives such as colorants and “glue” often generates
more carbon emissions than does normal paper production. However, using recycled papers enables better resource
management overall.
Lexmark concerns itself with the responsible use of paper in general based on life cycle assessments of its products. To
gain a better understanding of the impact of printers on the environment, the company commissioned a number of
life cycle assessments and found that paper was identified as the primary contributor (up to 80%) of carbon emissions
caused throughout the entire life of a device (from design to end-of-life). This is due to the energy-intensive
manufacturing processes required to make paper.
Thus, Lexmark seeks to educate customers and partners on minimizing the impact of paper. Using recycled paper is
one way. Eliminating excessive and unnecessary paper consumption is another. Lexmark is well-equipped to help
customers minimize printing and copying waste. In addition, the company encourages purchasing paper from suppliers
who demonstrate their commitment to sustainable forestry practices.
Lexmark does not endorse specific suppliers, although a converter’s product list for special applications is maintained.
However, the following paper choice guidelines will help alleviate the environmental impact of printing:
1 Minimize paper consumption.
2 Be selective about the origin of wood fiber. Buy from suppliers who carry certifications such as the Forestry
Stewardship Council (FSC) or The Program for the Endorsement of Forest Certification (PEFC). These certifications
guarantee that the paper manufacturer uses wood pulp from forestry operators that employ environmentally and
socially responsible forest management and restoration practices.
3 Choose the most appropriate paper for printing needs: normal 75 or 80 g/m2 certified paper, lower weight paper,
or recycled paper.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Paper and specialty media guidelines
80
Unacceptable paper examples
Test results indicate that the following paper types are at risk for use with laser printers:
• Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers
• Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the paper
• Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser
• Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise location on the page) greater than ± 2.3 mm (± 0.9 in.),
such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms. In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software
application to successfully print on these forms.)
• Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
• Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers
• Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European testing)
• Paper weighing less than 60 g/m2 (16 lb)
• Multiple part forms or documents
For more information about Lexmark, visit www.lexmark.com. General sustainability-related information can be found
at the Environmental Sustainability link.
Storing paper
Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:
• For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40%. Most label
manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18 to24°C(65 to75°F) with relative humidity between
40 and 60%.
• Store paper in cartons when possible, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.
• Store individual packages on a flat surface.
• Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Paper and specialty media guidelines
81
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights
The following tables provide information on standard and optional paper input sources and the types of paper they
support.
Note: To use a paper size that is unlisted, configure a Universal Paper Size.
Supported paper sizes
Paper size and
dimension
Standard
550‑sheet
tray
Optional
550‑sheet
tray
Optional
Multipurpose
feeder
Optional
550‑sheet
specialty
media
Manual
paper
Manual
envelope
Duplex ADF
Scanner
glass
2000‑sheet
high‑capacity
feeder
drawer
A4
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1,2,3,4
1,2,3,4
2
210 x 297 mm
(8.27 x 11.7 in.)
1,2,3,4
1,2,3,4
A5
X
2
148 x 210 mm
(5.83 x 8.27 in.)
A6
X
X
X
X
X
105 x 148 mm (4.13
x 5.83 in.)
JIS B5
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1,2,3,4
1,2,3,4
1,2,3,4
1,2,3,4
2
182 x 257 mm
(7.17 x 10.1 in.)
1,2,3,4
1,2,3,4
1,2,3,4
1,2,3,4
Letter
1
215.9 x 279.4 mm
(8.5 x 11 in.)
Legal
1
215.9 x 355.6 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
Executive
X
184.2 x 266.7 mm
(7.25 x 10.5 in.)
Oficio (México)
X
X
2,3
215.9 x 340.4 mm
(8.5 x 13.4 in.)
Folio
1,2,3,4
215.9 x 330.2 mm
(8.5 x 13 in.)
1,2,3,4
1 Source supports paper size with size sensing.
2 Source supports paper size without size sensing.
3 Paper size is supported if set to US.
4 Paper size is supported if set to metric.
5 Paper size is supported if its length is between 8.27 in. (210 mm) and 14 in. (355.6 mm); and its width is between 5.5 in. (139.7 mm) and 8.5 in. (215.9 mm).
6 This size setting formats the envelope for 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) unless the size is specified by the software program.
7 Turn Size Sensing off to support universal sizes that are close to standard paper or specialty media sizes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Paper and specialty media guidelines
82
Paper size and
dimension
Standard
550‑sheet
tray
Optional
550‑sheet
tray
Optional
Multipurpose
feeder
Optional
550‑sheet
specialty
media
Manual
paper
Manual
envelope
Duplex ADF
Scanner
glass
2000‑sheet
high‑capacity
feeder
drawer
Statement
X
X
X
X
X
X
2
1
2
2
2
1,2,3,4
139.7 x 215.9 mm
(5.5 x 8.5 in.)
1,2,3,4
Universal7
2
1
5
2
2
148 x 210 mm to
215.9 x 355.6 mm
(5.83 x 8.27 in. to
8.5 x 14 in.)
Universal7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
2
2
76.2 x 127 mm
(3 x 5 in.) to
215.9 x 1219.2 mm
(8.5 x 48 in.)
7 3/4 Envelope
(Monarch)
2
2
98.4 x 190.5 mm
(3.875 x 7.5 in.)
9 Envelope
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
98.4 x 226.1 mm
(3.875 x 8.9 in.)
Com 10 Envelope
104.8 x 241.3 mm
(4.12 x 9.5 in.)
DL Envelope
110 x 220 mm
(4.33 x 8.66 in.)
C5 Envelope
162 x 229 mm
(6.38 x 9.01 in.)
B5 Envelope
176 x 250 mm
(6.93 x 9.84 in.)
Other Envelope6
85.7 x 165 mm to
215.9 x 355.6 mm
(3.375 x 6.50 in. to
8.5 x 14 in.)
1 Source supports paper size with size sensing.
2 Source supports paper size without size sensing.
3 Paper size is supported if set to US.
4 Paper size is supported if set to metric.
5 Paper size is supported if its length is between 8.27 in. (210 mm) and 14 in. (355.6 mm); and its width is between 5.5 in. (139.7 mm) and 8.5 in. (215.9 mm).
6 This size setting formats the envelope for 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) unless the size is specified by the software program.
7 Turn Size Sensing off to support universal sizes that are close to standard paper or specialty media sizes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Paper and specialty media guidelines
83
Supported paper types and weights
The printer supports 60–220‑g/m2 (16–58‑lb) paper weights.
Note: Labels, transparencies, envelopes, and card stock always print at reduced speed.
Paper type
Standard or
optional
550‑sheet tray
Optional
Optional
2,000‑sheet
Multipurpose
feeder
Manual Paper
Manual
Envelope
Duplex
550‑sheet
specialty media high‑capacity
drawer
feeder
Paper
X
• Plain
• Bond
• Colored
• Letterhead
• Preprinted
• Light
• Glossy
• Heavy
• Heavy Glossy
• Recycled
Card stock
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Transparencies
Labels
• Paper
• Vinyl
Envelopes
X
X
X
X
Custom Type [x]
Rough/Cotton
X
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing
84
Printing
The use of print preview and the selection of desired printing preferences such as duplex, margins and paper size can
ensure that the print job output will appear as desired.
Printing forms
Use the Forms and Favorites application to quickly and easily access frequently used forms or other information that
is regularly printed. Before you can use this application, first set it up on the printer. For more information, see “Setting
1 From the printer home screen, navigate to:
Forms and Favorites > select the form from the list > enter the number of copies > adjust other settings
2 Depending on your printer model, touch
,
, or Submit.
Printing a document
Printing a document
1 From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper type and size to match the paper loaded.
2 Send the print job:
For Windows users
a With a document open, click File > Print.
b Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
c Adjust the settings, if necessary.
d Click OK > Print.
For Macintosh users
a Customize the settings in the Page Setup dialog:
1 With a document open, choose File > Page Setup.
2 Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the paper loaded.
3 Click OK.
b Customize the settings in the Print dialog:
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2 From the Print dialog and pop‑up menus, adjust the settings if necessary.
Note: To print on a specific paper type, adjust the paper type setting to match the paper loaded, or
select the appropriate tray or feeder.
3 Click Print.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing
85
Printing in black and white
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Print Mode > Black Only > Submit
Adjusting toner darkness
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness.
3 Adjust the toner darkness setting.
4 Click Submit.
Using Max Speed and Max Yield
The Max Speed and Max Yield settings let you choose between a faster print speed or a higher toner yield. Max Yield
is the factory default setting.
• Max Speed—This lets you print in either black or color depending on what is set in the printer driver. The printer
prints in color unless Black Only is selected in the printer driver.
• Max Yield—This lets you switch from black to color based on the color content found on each page. Frequent color
mode switching can result in slower printing if the content of pages is mixed.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Print Settings > Setup Menu.
3 From the Printer Usage list, select Max Speed or Max Yield.
4 Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Print Settings > Setup Menu
2 From the Printer Usage list, select Max Speed or Max Yield.
3 Touch Submit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing
86
Printing from a mobile device
For the list of supported mobile devices and to download a compatible mobile printing application, visit
Note: Mobile printing applications may also be available from your mobile device manufacturer.
Printing from a flash drive
Printing from a flash drive
Notes:
• Before printing an encrypted PDF file, you will be prompted to enter the file password from the printer control
panel.
• You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.
1 Insert a flash drive into the USB port.
Notes:
• A flash drive icon appears on the home screen and in the held jobs icon when a flash drive is installed.
• If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred, then the
printer ignores the flash drive.
• If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs, then Busyappears. After these
print jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents from the flash drive.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any network adapter, any connector, the memory
device, or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing, reading, or writing from the memory device. A
loss of data can occur.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing
87
2 From the printer control panel, touch the document you want to print.
3 Touch the arrows to specify the number of copies for printing, and then touch Print.
Notes:
• Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.
• If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, then you can still print
files from the flash drive as held jobs.
Supported flash drives and file types
Flash drive
File type
Documents:
• .pdf
• Lexar JumpDrive 2.0 Pro (256MB, 512MB, or 1GB sizes)
• SanDisk Cruzer Mini (256MB, 512MB, or 1GB sizes)
• .xps
Notes:
Images:
• .dcx
• .gif
• Hi‑Speed USB flash drives must support the full‑speed standard. Devices supporting only
USB low‑speed capabilities are not supported.
• USB flash drives must support the File Allocation Table (FAT) system. Devices formatted
with New Technology File System (NTFS) or any other file system are not supported.
• .JPEG or .jpg
• .bmp
• .pcx
• .TIFF or .tif
• .png
• .fls
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing
88
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Storing print jobs in the printer
1 From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Security > Confidential Print
Print job type
Description
Confidential
Lets you hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the printer
control panel
Note: The PIN is set from the computer. It must be four digits, using the
numbers 0–9.
Verify
Lets you print one copy of a print job while the printer holds the remaining
copies. It allows you to examine if the first copy is satisfactory. The print job is
automatically deleted from the printer memory once all copies are printed.
Reserve
Lets you store print jobs for printing at a later time. The print jobs are held until
deleted from the Held Jobs menu.
Repeat
Lets you print and store print jobs in the printer memory for reprinting.
Notes:
• You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer
control panel. All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs.
• Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to
process additional held jobs.
2 Touch Submit.
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Note: Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing. Repeat and Reserve
jobs are held in the printer until you delete them.
For Windows users
1 With a document open, click File > Print.
2 Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3 Click Print and Hold.
4 Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential
print job, also enter a four‑digit PIN.
5 Click OK or Print.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing
89
6 From the printer home screen, release the print job.
• For confidential print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > Print
• For other print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print
For Macintosh users
1 With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2 From the print options or Copies & Pages pop‑up menu, choose Job Routing.
3 Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential
print job, also enter a four‑digit PIN.
4 Click OK or Print.
5 From the printer home screen, release the print job.
• For confidential print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > Print
• For other print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print
Printing information pages
Printing a font sample list
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Fonts
2 Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.
Printing a directory list
A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or on the printer hard disk.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Directory
Printing on specialty media
Tips on using letterhead
• Use letterhead designed specifically for laser printers.
• Print samples on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing
90
• Before loading letterhead, flex the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.
• Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead. For information on how to load letterhead, see:
Tips on using transparencies
Print samples on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.
When printing on transparencies:
• Feed transparencies from any tray or drawer, except the optional 2,000‑sheet high‑capacity feeder.
• Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure
transparencies are able to withstand temperatures up to 170°C (338°F) without melting, discoloring, offsetting, or
releasing hazardous emissions.
• To prevent print quality problems, avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies.
• Before loading transparencies, flex the stack to prevent sheets from sticking together.
• We recommend Lexmark part number 12A8240 for letter‑size transparencies and Lexmark part number 12A8241
for A4‑size transparencies.
Tips on using envelopes
Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.
• Use envelopes designed specifically for laser/LED printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure that
the envelopes can withstand temperatures up to 220°C (446°F) without sealing, wrinkling, curling excessively, or
releasing hazardous emissions.
• For best performance, use envelopes made from 90 g/m2 (24 lb bond) paper or 25% cotton. All‑cotton envelopes
must not exceed 70 g/m2 (20 lb bond) weight.
• Use only new envelopes from undamaged packages.
• To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:
– Have excessive curl or twist
– Are stuck together or damaged in any way
– Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing
– Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars
– Have an interlocking design
– Have postage stamps attached
– Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position
– Have bent corners
– Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes
• Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes.
Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and the high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing
91
Tips on using labels
Notes:
• Single‑sided paper labels designed for laser/LED printers are supported for occasional use.
• It is recommended to print no more than 20 pages of paper labels a month.
• Vinyl, pharmacy, and dual‑sided labels are not supported.
For detailed information on label printing, characteristics, and design, see the Card Stock & Label Guide available on
When printing on labels:
• Use labels designed specifically for laser/LED printers. Check with the manufacturer or vendor to verify that:
– The labels can withstand temperatures up to 210°C (410°F) without sealing, excessive curling, wrinkling, or
releasing hazardous emissions.
Note: Labels can be printed at a higher fusing temperature up to 220°C (428°F) if Label Weight is set to
Heavy. Select this setting using the Embedded Web Server, or from the printer control panel Paper menu.
– Label adhesives, face sheet (printable stock), and topcoats can withstand up to 25 psi (172 kPa) pressure without
delaminating, oozing around the edges, or releasing hazardous fumes.
• Do not use labels with slick backing material.
• Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial sheets
also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and cartridge warranties.
• Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.
• Do not print within 1 mm (0.04 in.) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or between die‑cuts of the label.
• Be sure adhesive backing does not reach to the sheet edge. Zone coating of the adhesive at least 1 mm (0.04 in.)
away from edges is recommended. Adhesive material contaminates the printer and could void the warranty.
• If zone coating of the adhesive is not possible, then remove a 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) strip on the leading and driver edge,
and use a non‑oozing adhesive.
• Portrait orientation works best, especially when printing bar codes.
Tips on using card stock
Card stock is heavy, single‑ply specialty media. Many of its variable characteristics, such as moisture content, thickness,
and texture, can significantly impact print quality. Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before
buying large quantities.
• From the Paper menu, set the Paper Type to Card Stock.
• Select the appropriate Paper Texture setting.
• Be aware that preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or
other paper handling problems.
• Check with the manufacturer or vendor to ensure the card stock can withstand temperatures up to 220°C (446°F)
without releasing hazardous emissions.
• Do not use preprinted card stock manufactured with chemicals that may contaminate the printer. Preprinting
introduces semi‑liquid and volatile components into the printer.
• Use grain short card stock when possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Printing
92
Canceling a print job
Canceling a print job from the printer control panel
1 Touch Cancel Jobs on the touch screen, or press
on the keypad.
2 Touch the job you want to cancel, and then touch Delete Selected Jobs.
Canceling a print job from the computer
For Windows users
1 Open the printers folder:
a Click
, or click Start and then click Run.
b In the Start Search or Run dialog, type control printers.
c Press Enter, or click OK.
2 Double‑click the printer icon.
3 Select the print job you want to cancel.
4 From the keyboard, press Delete.
For Macintosh users
In Mac OS X version 10.5 or later:
1 From the Apple menu, choose System Preferences > Print & Fax > Open Print Queue.
2 From the printer window, select the print job you want to cancel.
3 From the icon bar at the top of the window, click the Delete icon.
In Mac OS X version 10.4:
1 From the Finder, navigate to:
Go > Applications > Utilities
2 Double‑click Print Center or Printer Setup Utility.
3 Double‑click the printer icon.
4 From the printer window, select the print job you want to cancel.
5 From the icon bar at the top of the window, click Delete.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying
93
Copying
ADF
Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
Making copies
Making a quick copy
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• When loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.
• Make sure the size of the original document and the copy paper size are the same. Failure to set the proper
size may result in a cropped image.
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 From the printer control panel, press
to start copying.
Copying using the ADF
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 Adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > change the copy settings > Copy It
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying
94
Copying using the scanner glass
1 Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > change the copy settings > Copy It
3 If you have more pages to scan, then place the next document on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the Next
Page.
4 Touch Finish the Job to return to the home screen.
Copying film photos
1 Place a photo facedown on the upper left corner of the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Content > Photo >
> Photo/Film >
> Copy It
3 Touch Scan the Next Page or Finish the Job.
Copying on specialty media
Copying on transparencies
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document >
4 Touch Copy to > select the tray that contains transparencies > Copy It.
5 If there are no trays that support transparencies, then select Manual Feeder and then touch
6 Select the desired size of the transparencies, and then select a Manual Feeder type.
7 Load transparencies in the multipurpose feeder, and then touch Copy It.
.
Copying on letterhead
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying
95
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > size of the original document > Copy to > Manual Feeder
4 Place the letterhead faceup, top edge first in the multipurpose feeder.
5 Select the size of the letterhead.
6 Navigate to:
Continue > Letterhead > Continue > Copy It
Customizing copy settings
Copying in black and white
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Allow color copies > Off >
> Submit
Copying to a different size
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 Touch Copy from > select the size of the original document >
.
5 Touch Copy to > select the size of the copy >
.
Note: The printer will scale the size automatically.
6 Touch Copy It.
Making copies using paper from a selected tray
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying
96
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > size of the original document > Copy to
4 Touch Manual Feeder or select the tray that contains the paper type you want to use.
Note: If you choose Manual Feeder, then you will also need to select the paper size and type.
5 Touch Copy It.
Copying different paper sizes
Use the ADF to copy original documents with different paper sizes. Depending on the paper sizes loaded and the “Copy
to” and “Copy from” settings, each copy is either printed on mixed paper sizes (Example 1) or scaled to fit a single paper
size (Example 2).
Example 1: Copying on mixed paper sizes
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes >
> Copy to > Auto Size Match >
> Copy It
The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned. Copies are printed on mixed paper sizes
corresponding to the paper sizes of the original document.
Example 2: Copying on a single paper size
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes >
> Copy to > Letter >
> Copy It
The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned, and then scales the mixed paper sizes to fit on
the paper size selected.
Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying
97
4 From the Sides (Duplex) area, touch the button for your preferred duplexing method.
The first number represents sides of the original documents; the second number represents sides of the copy. For
example, select 1‑sided to 2‑sided if you have 1-sided original documents and you want 2‑sided copies.
5 Touch
, and then Copy It.
Reducing or enlarging copies
Copies can be reduced to 25% of the original document size or enlarged to 400% of the original document size. The
factory default setting for Scale is Auto. If you leave Scale set to Auto, the content of your original document will be
scaled to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.
To reduce or enlarge a copy:
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 On the home screen, touch Copy.
4 From the Scale area, touch the arrows to enlarge or reduce your copies.
Touching “Copy to” or “Copy from” after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto.
5 Touch Copy It.
Adjusting copy quality
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Content
4 Touch the button that best represents the content type of the document you are copying:
• Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Graphics—Use when the original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
• Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
• Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.
5 Touch
.
6 Touch the button that best represents the content source of the document you are copying:
• Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Black/White Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
• Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying
98
• Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.
• Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.
• Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.
• Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.
• Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
7 Touch
> Copy It.
Collating copies
If you print multiple copies of a document, then you can choose to print each copy as a set (collated) or to print the
copies as groups of pages (not collated).
Collated
Not collated
By default, Collate is set to On. If you do not want to collate your copies, then change the setting to Off:
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > enter the number of copies > Collate > Off >
> Copy It
Placing separator sheets between copies
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Separator Sheets
Note: Set Collate to On to place the separator sheets between copies. If Collate is set to Off, then the separator
sheets are added to the end of the print job.
3 Select one of the following:
• Between Copies
• Between Jobs
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying
99
• Between Pages
• Off
4 Touch
> Copy It.
Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet
In order to save paper, you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto a single
sheet of paper.
Notes:
• The Paper Size must be set to Letter, Legal, A4, or JIS B5.
• The Copy Size must be set to 100%.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Paper Saver > select desired output >
> Copy It
Creating a custom copy job (job build)
The custom copy job or job build is used to combine one or more sets of original documents into a single copy job. Each
set may be scanned using different job parameters. When a copy job is submitted and Custom Job is enabled, the
scanner scans the first set of original documents using the supplied parameters, and then it scans the next set with the
same or different parameters.
The definition of a set depends on the scan source:
• If you scan a document on the scanner glass, then a set consists of one page.
• If you scan multiple pages using the ADF, then a set consists of all scanned pages until the ADF becomes empty.
• If you scan one page using the ADF, then a set consists of one page.
For example:
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Options > Custom Job > On > Done > Copy It
When the end of a set is reached, the scan screen appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying
100
4 Load the next document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass, and then touch
Scan the Automatic Document Feeder or Scan the flatbed.
Note: If required, change the job settings.
5 If you have another document to scan, then repeat the previous step. Otherwise, touch Finish the job.
Placing information on copies
Placing the date and time at the top of each page
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Header/Footer
4 Pick an area of the page where you want to place the date and time.
5 Touch Yes or No >
> Copy It.
Placing an overlay message on each page
An overlay message can be placed on each page. The message choices are Urgent, Confidential, Copy, Custom or Draft.
To place a message on the copies:
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Advanced Options > Overlay > select overlay message >
.
4 Touch Copy It.
Canceling a copy job
Canceling a copy job while the document is in the ADF
When the ADF begins processing a document, the scanning screen appears. To cancel the copy job, touch Cancel Job
on the touch screen.
A “Canceling scan job” screen appears. The ADF clears all pages in the ADF and cancels the job.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying
101
Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass
Touch Cancel Job on the touch screen.
A “Canceling scan job” screen appears. Once the job is canceled, the copy screen appears.
Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed
1 From the home screen, touch Cancel Job, or press
2 Touch the job you want to cancel.
3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs.
on the keypad.
Understanding the copy screens and options
Copy from
This option opens a screen where you can enter the paper size of the original document.
• Touch a paper size that matches the original document.
• Touch Mixed Sizes to copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes with the same width.
• Touch Auto Size Sense to allow the scanner to automatically determine the size of the original document.
Copy to
This option opens a screen where you can enter the paper size and type on which your copies will be printed.
• Touch the paper size and type that matches the paper loaded.
• If the settings for “Copy from” and “Copy to” are different, then the printer automatically adjusts the Scale setting
to accommodate the difference.
• If the paper type or size that you want to copy onto is not loaded in one of the trays, then touch Manual Feeder,
and manually load the paper in the multipurpose feeder.
• When “Copy to” is set to Auto Size Match, each copy matches the paper size of the original document. If a matching
paper size is not in one of the trays, then Paper size not foundappears and prompts to load a paper in a
tray or multipurpose feeder.
Copies
This option allows you to set the number of copies to be printed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying
102
Scale
This option creates an image from your copy that is proportionally scaled anywhere between 25% and 400%. Scale can
also be set for you automatically.
• When you want to copy from one size of paper to another, such as from legal‑size to letter‑size paper, setting the
“Copy from”and “Copy to” paper sizes automatically changes thescale to keep all the original document information
on your copy.
• Touch the left arrow to decrease the value by 1%; touch the right arrow to increase the value by 1%.
• Hold your finger on an arrow to make a continuous increment change.
• Hold your finger on an arrow for two seconds to cause the pace of the change to accelerate.
Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your copies will turn out in relation to the original document.
Sides (Duplex)
Use this option to select duplex settings. You can print copies on one or two sides, make two-sided copies (duplex) of
two-sided original documents, make two-sided copies from one-sided original documents, or make one-sided copies
(simplex) from two-sided original documents.
Collate
This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document. The
factory default setting for Collate is on; the output pages of your copies will be ordered (1,2,3) (1,2,3) (1,2,3). If you
want all the copies of each page to remain together, turn Collate off, and your copies will be ordered (1,1,1) (2,2,2)
(3,3,3).
Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphics.
• Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Graphics—Use when the original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
• Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
• Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.
Choose content source from Color Laser, Black/White Laser, Inkjet, Photo/Film, Magazine, Newspaper, Press, or Other.
• Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Black/White Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
• Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
• Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.
• Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.
• Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Copying
103
• Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.
• Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
Color
This option enables or disables color for the scanned image.
Advanced Options
Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings:
• Advanced Duplex—Use to specify the document orientation, whether documents are one-sided or two-sided, and
how documents are bound.
Note: Some Advanced Duplex options are available only on select printers.
• Advanced Imaging—Use to change or adjust Auto Center, Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout,
Contrast, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings
before you copy the document.
• Create Booklet—Use to create a booklet. You can choose between 1‑sided and 2‑sided.
Note: This option appears only when a print duplexer and printer hard disk are installed.
• Cover Page Setup—Use to set copy cover page and booklet cover page.
• Custom Job—Use to combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
• Edge Erase—Use toeliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within
the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
• Header/Footer—Use to turn on Date/Time, Page number, Bates number, or Custom text, and prints them in the
specified header or footer location.
• Margin Shift—Use to increase the size of the margin of a specified distance by shifting the scanned image. This can
be useful in providing space to bind or hole-punch copies. Use the increase or decrease arrows to set how much of
a margin you want. If the additional margin is too large, then the copy will be cropped.
• Overlay—Use to create a watermark (or message) that overlays the content of your copy. You can choose from
Urgent, Confidential, Copy, and Draft, or you can enter a custom message in the ”Enter custom text” field. The word
you pick will appear, faintly, in large print across each page.
Note: A custom overlay can also be created by your system support person. When a custom overlay is created, a
button with an icon of that overlay will be available.
• Paper Saver—Use to print two or more sheets of an original document together on the same page. Paper Saver is
also called N-up printing. The N stands for Number. For example, 2-up would print two pages of your document on
a single page, and 4-up would print four pages of your document on a single page. Touching Print Page Borders
adds or removes the outline border surrounding the original document pages on the output page.
• Separator Sheets—Use to place a blank piece of paper between copies, pages, or print jobs. The separator sheets
can be drawn from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper your copies are
printed on.
Save As Shortcut
This option allows the current settings to be saved as a shortcut by assigning a number.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E-mailing
104
E-mailing
ADF
Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
You can use the printer to e‑mail scanned documents to one or more recipients. There are three ways to send an e‑mail
from the printer. You can type the e‑mail address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book.
Getting ready to e-mail
Setting up the e-mail function
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Under Default Settings, click E-mail/FTP Settings.
4 Click E-mail Settings > Setup E-mail Server.
5 Fill in the fields with the appropriate information.
6 Click Submit.
Configuring e‑mail settings
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E-mailing
105
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings.
3 Fill in the fields with the appropriate information.
4 Click Submit.
Creating an e-mail shortcut
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
3 Under Other Settings, click Manage Shortcuts > E-mail Shortcut Setup.
4 Type a unique name for the recipient, and then enter the e-mail address.
Note: If you are entering multiple addresses, then separate each address with a comma (,).
5 Select the scan settings (Format, Content, Color, and Resolution).
6 Enter a shortcut number, and then click Add.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient > type an e‑mail address
To create a group of recipients, touch Next address, and then type the next recipient’s e-mail address.
2 Touch
.
3 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.
4 Verify that the shortcut name is correct, and then touch OK.
If the shortcut name is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E-mailing
106
E-mailing a document
Sending an e-mail using the printer control panel
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
Note: Make sure the size of the original document and the copy paper size are the same. Failure to set the
proper size may result to a cropped image.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient
4 Enter the e‑mail address, or press
and then enter the shortcut number.
To enter additional recipients, touch Next Address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to
add.
Note: You can also enter an e‑mail address using the address book.
5 Touch Done > Send It.
Sending an e‑mail using a shortcut number
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Press
, enter the shortcut number using the keypad, and then touch
.
To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to
add.
4 Touch Send It.
Sending an e‑mail using the address book
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail >Recipient(s) >
> enter the name of recipient > Browse shortcuts
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E-mailing
107
4 Touch the name of the recipients.
To enter additional recipients, touch Next address, and then enter the address or shortcut number you want to
add, or search the address book.
5 Touch Done.
Customizing e-mail settings
Adding e-mail subject and message information
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, touch E-mail.
4 Type an e‑mail address.
5 Touch Options > Subject.
6 Type the e-mail subject.
7 Touch Done > Message.
8 Type an e-mail message.
9 Touch Done > E-mail It.
Changing the output file type
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient > type an e‑mail address > Send as
4 Touch the button that represents the file type you want to send.
• PDF—Use this to create a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided
free by Adobe at www.adobe.com.
• Secure PDF—Use this to create an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access.
• TIFF—Use this to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the
Embedded Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent
JPEG.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E-mailing
108
• JPEG—Use this to create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document, viewable by most
Web browsers and graphics programs.
• XPS—Use thisto create a single XMLPaperSpecification (XPS)file withmultiple pages, viewable usinganInternet
Explorer-hosted viewer and the .NET Framework, or by downloading a third‑party standalone viewer.
5 Touch E‑mail It.
Note: If you selected Secure PDF, you will be prompted to enter your password twice.
Canceling an e-mail
• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanningappears.
• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanningappears, or while Scan the Next Page/
Finish the Jobappears.
Understanding e-mail options
Recipients
This option lets you enter the destination of your e-mail. You may enter multiple e‑mail addresses.
Subject
This option lets you enter a subject line for your e-mail.
Message
This option lets you enter a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment.
File Name
This option lets you customize the attachment file name.
Original Size
This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents you are going to e-mail.
• Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting. The e‑mail screen appears with the new
setting displayed.
• When “Original Size” is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes.
Resolution
Adjusts the output quality of your e-mail. Increasing the image resolution increases the e-mail file size and the time
needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the e-mail file size.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E-mailing
109
Color
This option sets the output color for the scanned image. Touch to enable or disable color.
Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.
Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphics.
• Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Graphics—Use when the original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
• Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
• Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.
Choose content source from Color Laser, Black/White Laser, Inkjet, Photo/Film, Magazine, Newspaper, Press, or Other.
• Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Black/White Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
• Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
• Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.
• Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.
• Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.
• Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.
• Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out in relation to the original document.
Send As
This option sets the output (PDF, TIFF, JPEG or XPS) for the scanned image.
• PDF—Creates a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided free by
Adobe at www.adobe.com.
• Secure PDF—Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access
• TIFF—Creates multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded
Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
• JPEG—Createsand attachesa separate file for each page ofyour original document, viewable by mostWeb browsers
and graphics programs
• XPS—Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet Explorer-hosted viewer and the .NET
Framework, or by downloading a third party standalone viewer
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E-mailing
110
Page Setup
This option lets you change the Sides (Duplex), Orientation, and Binding.
• Sides (Duplex)— Specifies if the original document is simplex (printed on one page) or duplex (printed on both
sides). This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.
• Orientation— Specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes Sides and Binding to match the
orientation.
• Binding— Specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.
Scan Preview
This option displays the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is scanned, the
scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Advanced Options
Touching this button opens a screen where you can change the following settings:
• Advanced Imaging—Use to adjust the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG Quality,
Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before you
e‑mail the document.
• Custom Job—Use to combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
• Edge Erase—Use toeliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within
the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
• Transmission Log—Use to print the transmission log or transmission error log.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Faxing
111
Faxing
Note: The fax function is available only in select printer models.
ADF
Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
Getting the printer ready to fax
The following connection methods may not be applicable in all countries or regions.
Note: During the initial printer setup, clear fax and any other function you plan to set up later, and then touch
Continue. The indicator light may blink red if the fax function is enabled and not fully set up.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or
make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning
storm.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending or
receiving a fax.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Faxing
112
Initial fax setup
Many countries and regions require outgoing faxes to contain the following information in a margin at the top or bottom
of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission: station name (identification of the business, other
entity, or individual sending the message) and station number (telephone number of the sending fax machine, business,
other entity, or individual).
To enter your fax setup information, use the printer control panel, or use your browser to access the Embedded Web
Server and then enter the Settings menu.
Note: If you do not have a TCP/IP environment, then you must use the printer control panel to enter your fax setup
information.
Using the printer control panel for fax setup
When the printer is turned on for the first time or if the printer has been off for an extended time, a series of start‑up
screens appear. If the printer has fax capabilities, then the following screens appear:
Fax Name or Station Name
Fax Number or Station Number
1 When Fax Nameor Station Nameappears, enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
2 After entering the Fax Name or Station Name, touch Submit.
3 When Fax Numberor Station Numberappears, enter the printer fax number.
4 After entering the Fax Number or Station Number, touch Submit.
Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3 In the Fax Name or Station Name field, enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
4 In the Fax Number or Station Number field, enter the printer fax number.
5 Click Submit.
Choosing a fax connection
Notes:
• The printer is an analog device that works best when directly connected to the telephone wall outlet. Other
devices(such as a telephone or answering machine) can be successfully attached to pass through the printer, as
described in the setup steps.
• If you want a digital connection such as ISDN, DSL, or ADSL, then a third-party device (such as a DSL filter) is
required. Contact your DSL provider for a DSL filter. The DSL filter removes the digital signal on the telephone
line that can interfere with the ability of the printer to fax properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Faxing
113
• You do not need to attach the printer to a computer, but you do need to connect it to an analog telephone line
to send and receive faxes.
Equipment and service options
Fax connection setup
Connect directly to the telephone line.
Connect to a Digital Subscriber Line (DSL or ADSL) service. See “Connecting to a DSL service” on page 113.
Connect to a Private Branch eXchange (PBX) or Integrated See “Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system” on page 114.
Services Digital Network (ISDN) system.
Use a Distinctive Ring service.
Connect through an adapter used in your area.
Connecting to an analog telephone line
If your telecommunications equipment uses a US‑style (RJ11) telephone line, then follow these steps to connect the
equipment:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port
.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
Connecting to a DSL service
If you subscribe to a DSL service, then contact the DSL provider to obtain a DSL filter and telephone cord, and then
follow these steps to connect the equipment:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the DSL filter.
.
Note: Your DSL filter may look different than the one in the illustration.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Faxing
114
3 Connect the DSL filter cable to an active telephone wall jack.
1
3
2
Connecting to a PBX or ISDN system
If you use a PBX or ISDN converter or terminal adapter, then follow these steps to connect the equipment:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port
.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the port designated for fax and telephone use.
Notes:
• Make sure the terminal adapter is set to the correct switch type for your region.
• Depending on the ISDN port assignment, you may have to connect to a specific port.
• When using a PBX system, make sure the call waiting tone is off.
• When using a PBX system, dial the outside line prefix before dialing the fax number.
• For more information on using the fax with a PBX system, see the documentation that came with your PBX
system.
Connecting to a distinctive ring service
A distinctive ring service may be available from your telephone service provider. This service allows you to have multiple
telephone numbers on one telephone line, with each telephone number having a different ring pattern. This may be
useful for distinguishing between fax and voice calls. If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service, then follow these
steps to connect the equipment:
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port
.
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Faxing
115
3 Change the Distinctive Rings setting to match the setting you want for the printer to answer:
Note: The factory default setting for distinctive rings is On. This allows the printer to answer single, double, and
triple ring patterns.
a From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Settings > Distinctive Rings
b Select the pattern setting you want to change, and then touch Submit.
Connecting to an adapter for your country or region
The following countries or regions may require a special adapter to connect the telephone cable to the active telephone
wall jack:
Country/Region
• Austria
• Cyprus
• Denmark
• Finland
• France
• Germany
• Ireland
• Italy
• New Zealand
• Netherlands
• Norway
• Portugal
• Sweden
• Switzerland
• United Kingdom
For some countries or regions, a telephone line adapter is included in the box. Use this adapter to connect an answering
machine, telephone, or other telecommunications equipment to the printer.
1 Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port
2 Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the adapter, and then connect the adapter to the active telephone
wall jack.
Note: Your telephone adapter may look different than the one shown. It will fit the wall jack used in your
location.
Setting the outgoing fax or station name and number
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Faxing
116
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3 In the Fax Name or Station Name field, enter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
4 In the Fax Number or Station Number field, enter the printer fax number.
5 Click Submit.
Setting the date and time
You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send. If there is a power failure, then you may
have to reset the date and time.
1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Security > Set Date and Time.
3 In the Set Date & Time field, enter the current date and time.
4 Click Submit.
Note: It is recommended to use the network time.
Configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time
The printer can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Security > Set Date and Time.
3 Click the Automatically Observe DST check box.
4 In the Custom Time Zone Setup section, set the DST start and end dates.
5 Click Submit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Faxing
117
Creating shortcuts
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
Instead of entering the entire phone number of a fax recipient on the printer control panel each time you want to send
a fax, you can create a permanent fax destination and assign a shortcut number. A shortcut can be created to a single
fax number or a group of fax numbers.
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Manage Shortcuts > Fax Shortcut Setup.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, get one from your system support
person.
3 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then enter the fax number.
To create a multiple‑number shortcut, enter the fax numbers for the group.
Note: Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon (;).
4 Assign a shortcut number.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
5 Click Add.
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, touch Fax, and then enter the fax number.
To create a group of fax numbers, touch Next number, and then enter the next fax number.
2 Touch
.
3 Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch Done.
4 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.
If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
Sending a fax
Sending a fax using the printer control panel
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Faxing
118
3 From the home screen, touch Fax.
4 Enter the fax number or a shortcut using the touch screen or keypad.
To add recipients, touch Next Number and then enter the recipient's telephone number or shortcut number, or
search the address book.
Note: To place a dial pause within a fax number, press
. The dial pause appears as a comma in the “Fax to”
field. Use this feature if you need to dial an outside line first.
5 Touch Fax It.
Sending a fax using the computer
The printer driver fax option allows you to “print to fax,” where the printer will send a queued document as a fax rather
than print it. The fax option functions as a normal fax machine, but is controlled through the printer driver instead of
the printer control panel.
1 With a document open, click File > Print.
2 Select the printer, and then navigate to:
Properties > Fax tab > Enable fax
3 Enter the recipient fax number(s) in the “Fax number(s)” field.
Fax numbers can be entered manually or by using the Phone Book feature.
4 If necessary, enter a prefix in the Dialing prefix field.
5 Select the appropriate paper size and page orientation.
6 If you want to include a cover page with the fax, then select Include cover page with fax, and enter the appropriate
information.
7 Click OK.
Notes:
• The Fax option is available for use only with the PostScript driver or the Universal Fax Driver. For information on
installing these drivers, see the Software and Documentation CD.
• The Fax option must be configured and enabled in the PostScript driver under Configuration tab before it can be
used.
• If the Always display settings prior to faxing check box is selected, then you will be prompted to verify the
recipient information before the fax is sent. If this check box is not selected, then the queued document will be
sent automatically as a fax when you click OK on the Fax tab.
Sending a fax using shortcuts
Fax shortcuts are just like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or fax machine. A shortcut number (1–99999) can
contain a single recipient or multiple recipients.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not place postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Faxing
119
3 Press
, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
4 Touch Fax It.
Sending a fax using the address book
The address book enables you to search for bookmarks and network directory servers.
Note: If the address book feature is not enabled, then contact your system support person.
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
• If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
• Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax >
3 Touch Browse shortcuts or, using the virtual keyboard, type the name or part of the name of the person whose fax
number you want to find.
Note: Do not attempt to search for multiple names at the same time.
4 Touch the name of the person you want to send the fax to, and then touch Done > Fax It.
Customizing fax settings
Changing the fax resolution
Settings range from Standard (fastest speed) to Super Fine (slowest speed but best quality).
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options
4 From the Resolution area, touch the arrows to change to the resolution you want.
5 Touch Fax It.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Faxing
120
Making a fax lighter or darker
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options
4 From the Darkness area, touch the arrows to adjust the darkness of the fax.
5 Touch Fax It.
Sending a fax at a scheduled time
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Options > Advanced Options > Delayed Send
Note: If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server, the Delayed Send button will not appear. Faxes waiting for transmission
are listed in the Fax Queue.
4 Touch the arrows to adjust the time the fax will be transmitted.
The time is increased or decreased in increments of 30 minutes. If the current time is shown, the left arrow is
unavailable.
5 Touch Fax It.
Note: The document is scanned and then faxed at the scheduled time.
Viewing a fax log
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Reports > Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log.
Blocking junk faxes
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Faxing
121
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Block No Name Fax.
Notes:
• This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or no fax station name.
• In the Banned Fax List field, enter the phone numbers or fax station names of specific fax callers you want to
block.
Canceling an outgoing fax
Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning
• When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning…appears.
• When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning…appears or while Scan the Next Page/
Finish the Jobappears.
Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory
1 On the home screen, touch Cancel Jobs.
The Cancel Jobs screen appears.
2 Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel.
Only three jobs appear on the screen; touch the down arrow until the job you want appears, and then touch the
job you want to cancel.
3 Touch Delete Selected Jobs.
The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears, the selected jobs are deleted, and then the home screen appears.
Understanding fax options
Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.
Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphics.
• Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Graphics—Use when the original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
• Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
• Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Faxing
122
Choose content source from Color Laser, Black/White Laser, Inkjet, Photo/Film, Magazine, Newspaper, Press, or Other.
• Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Black/White Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
• Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
• Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.
• Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.
• Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.
• Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.
• Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
Resolution
This options increases how closely the scanner examines the document you want to fax. If you are faxing a photo, a
drawing with fine lines, or a document with very small text, then increase the Resolution setting. This will increase the
amount of time required for the scan and will increase the quality of the fax output.
• Standard—Suitable for most documents
• Fine 200 dpi—Recommended for documents with small print
• Super fine 300 dpi—Recommended for original documents with fine detail
• Ultra fine 600 dpi—Recommended for documents with pictures or photos
Note: Fine 200 dpi and Super fine 300 dpi is displayed when color printing is selected.
Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your faxes will turn out in relation to the original document.
Color
This option enables or disables color in faxing.
Page Setup
This option lets you change the Sides (Duplex), Orientation, and Binding settings.
• Sides (Duplex)—Use to specify if the original document is simplex (printed on one page) or duplex (printed on both
sides). This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax.
• Orientation—Use to specify the orientation of the original document, and then changes Sides and Binding to match
the orientation.
• Binding—Use to specify if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.
Scan Preview
This option displays the first page of the image before it is included in the fax. When the first page is scanned, the
scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Faxing
123
Delayed Send
This lets you send a fax at a later time or date.
1 Set up your fax.
2 From the home screen, navigate to:
Delayed Send > enter the date and time you want to send your fax > Done
Note: If the printer is turned off when the delayed fax is scheduled to be sent, then the fax is sent the next time the
printer is turned on.
This setting can be especially useful in sending information to fax lines that are not readily available during certain
hours, or when transmission times are cheaper.
Advanced Options
Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings:
• Advanced Imaging—Use to adjust the BackgroundRemoval, Contrast, Color Balance, Negative Image, Mirror Image,
Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before you fax the document.
• Custom Job—Use to combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
• Edge Erase—Use toeliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within
the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
• Transmission Log—Use to print the transmission log or transmission error log.
Holding and forwarding faxes
Holding faxes
This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released. Held faxes can be released manually or
at a scheduled day or time.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Holding Faxes.
3 From the Held Fax Mode menu, select one of the following:
• Off
• Always On
• Manual
• Scheduled
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Faxing
124
4 If you selected Scheduled, then continue with the following steps:
a Click Fax Holding Schedule.
b From the Action menu, select Hold faxes.
c From the Time menu, select the time you want the held faxes released.
d From the Day(s) menu, select the day you want the held faxes released.
5 Click Add.
Forwarding a fax
This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number, e‑mail address, FTP site, or LDSS.
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings.
3 From the Fax Forwarding menu, select one of the following:
• Print
• Print and Forward
• Forward
4 From the “Forward to” menu, select one of the following:
• Fax
• E‑mail
• FTP
• LDSS
• eSF
5 In the Forward to Shortcut field, enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded.
Note: The shortcut number must be valid for the setting selected in the “Forward to” menu.
6 Click Submit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scanning
125
Scanning
Using Scan to Network
Scan to Network lets you scan your documents to network destinations specified by your system support person. After
the destinations (shared network folders) have been established on the network, the setup process for the application
involves installing and configuring the application on the appropriate printer using its Embedded Web Server. For more
Scanning to an FTP address
ADF
Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. Only one FTP address may be
used at a time.
Once an FTP destination has been configured by your system support person, the name of the destination becomes
available as a shortcut number, or it is listed as a profile under the Held Jobs icon.
Creating shortcuts
Instead of typing the entire FTP site address on the printer control panel each time you want to send a document to
an FTP server, you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number.
Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scanning
126
2 Click Settings.
3 Under Other Settings, click Manage Shortcuts.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, get one from your system support
person.
4 Click FTP Shortcut Setup.
5 Enter the appropriate information.
6 Enter a shortcut number.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
7 Click Add.
Creating an FTP shortcut using the touch screen
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > type the FTP address >
> enter a name for the shortcut > Done
2 Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK. If the name or number is incorrect, then
touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
3 Touch Submit.
Scanning to an FTP address
Scanning to an FTP address using the printer control panel
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > FTP > type the FTP address > Send It
Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Press
, and then enter the FTP shortcut number.
4 Touch Send It.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scanning
127
Scanning to an FTP address using the address book
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, adjust the paper guides.
3 From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > FTP >
> enter the name of recipient > Browse shortcuts > name of recipient > Search
Using the FTP options
FTP
This option lets you enter the IP address for the FTP destination.
Note: Addresses should be in dot notation form (for example: yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy).
File Name
This option lets you enter the file name of the scanned document.
Original Size
This option opens a screen where you can choose the size of the documents for FTP sending.
• Touch a paper size button to select that size as the Original Size setting. The FTP screen appears with the new setting
displayed.
• When “Original Size” is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes.
• When “Original Size” is set to Auto Size Sense, the scanner automatically determines the size of the original
document.
Send As
This option sets the output (PDF, TIFF, JPEG or XPS) for the scanned image.
• PDF—Creates a single file with multiple pages, viewable with Adobe Reader. Adobe Reader is provided free by
Adobe at www.adobe.com.
• Secure PDF—Creates an encrypted PDF file that protects the file contents from unauthorized access
• TIFF—Creates multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the Embedded
Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
• JPEG—Createsand attachesa separate file for each page ofyour original document, viewable by mostWeb browsers
and graphics programs
• XPS—Creates a single XPS file with multiple pages, viewable using an Internet Explorer-hosted viewer and the .NET
Framework, or by downloading a third party standalone viewer
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scanning
128
Color
This option enables or disables color for the scanned image.
Resolution
This option adjusts the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time
needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size.
Page Setup
This option lets you change the Sides (Duplex), Orientation, and Binding.
• Sides (Duplex)— Specifies if the original document is simplex (printed on one page) or duplex (printed on both
sides). This also identifies what needs to be scanned.
• Orientation— Specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides and Binding settings
to match the orientation.
• Binding— Specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.
Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.
Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphics.
• Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Graphics—Use when the original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
• Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
• Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.
Choose content source from Color Laser, Black/White Laser, Inkjet, Photo/Film, Magazine, Newspaper, Press, or Other.
• Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Black/White Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
• Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
• Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.
• Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.
• Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.
• Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.
• Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
Scan Preview
This option displays the first page of the original document before it is scanned completely. When the first page is
scanned, the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scanning
129
Advanced Options
Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings:
• Advanced Imaging—Use to adjust the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG Quality,
Negative Image, Mirror Image, Scan edge to edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature image output
settings before sending the image.
• Edge Erase—Use toeliminate smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within
the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
• Transmission Log—Use to print the transmission log or transmission error log.
• Custom Job—Use to combine multiple scanning jobs into a single job.
Scanning to a computer or flash drive
ADF
Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single pages, small items (such as postcards or
photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer or a flash drive. The computer does not have to be directly
connected to the printer for you to receive Scan-to-PC images. You can scan the document back to the computer over
the network by creating a scan profile from the computer and then downloading the profile to the printer.
Scanning to a computer
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Scan Profile > Create.
3 Select your scan settings, and then click Next.
4 Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scanned output file.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scanning
130
5 Enter a scan name.
The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display.
6 Click Submit.
7 Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen.
A shortcut number was automatically assigned when you clicked Submit. You can use this shortcut number when
you are ready to scan your documents.
a Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
b If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
c Press
, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad, or touch Held Jobs on the home screen, and
then touch Profiles.
d After entering the shortcut number, the scanner scans and sends the document to the directory or program
you specified. If you touched Profiles on the home screen, then locate your shortcut on the list.
8 Return to the computer to view the file.
The output file is saved in the location or launched in the program you specified.
Scanning to a flash drive
1 Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
2 If you are loading a document into the ADF, then adjust the paper guides.
3 Insert the flash drive into the USB port on the front of the printer.
The USB Drive home screen appears.
4 Select the destination folder, and then touch Scan to USB drive.
5 Adjust the scan settings.
6 Touch Scan It.
Using the ScanBack Utility
You can use the Lexmark ScanBackTM Utility instead of the Embedded Web Server to create scan‑to‑PC profiles. The
ScanBack Utility can be downloaded from the Lexmark Web site home page on http:\\support.lexmark.com.
1 Set up your scan‑to‑PC profile:
a Launch the ScanBack Utility.
b Select the printer.
If no printers are listed, then contact your system support person, or click Setup to manually search for an IP
address or host name.
c Follow the instructions on your computer screen to define the type of document being scanned and what kind
of output you want to create.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scanning
131
d Select any of the following:
• Show MFP Instructions—View or print the instructions.
• Create Shortcut—Save this group of settings to use again.
e Click Finish.
A dialog box appears with your scan profile information and the status of the received images.
2 Scan your original documents:
a Load all pages in the ADF or on the scanner glass.
b From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Scan/Email > Profiles > select your scan profile > Submit
Note: Your output file is saved in a directory or launched in the application you specified.
Using the scan profile options
Original Size
This option sets the size of the documents you are going to scan. When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes, you can scan
an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter‑ and legal‑size pages).
Resolution
This option adjusts the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the time
needed to scan your original document. Image resolution can be decreased to reduce the file size.
Color
This option enables or disables color for the scanned image.
Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.
Choose content type from Text, Text/Photo, Photo, or Graphics.
• Text—Use when the content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
• Graphics—Use when the original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
• Text/Photo—Use when the original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
• Photo—Use when the original document is mostly a photo or an image.
Choose content source from Color Laser, Black/White Laser, Inkjet, Photo/Film, Magazine, Newspaper, Press, or Other.
• Color Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a color laser printer.
• Black/White Laser—Use when the original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
• Inkjet—Use when the original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
• Photo/Film—Use when the original document is a photo from film.
• Magazine—Use when the original document is from a magazine.
• Newspaper—Use when the original document is from a newspaper.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scanning
132
• Press—Use when the original document was printed using a printing press.
• Other—Use when the original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
Darkness
This option adjusts how light or dark your scanned documents will turn out in relation to the original document.
Page Setup
This option lets you change the Sides (Duplex), Orientation, and Binding.
• Sides (Duplex)— Use this to specify if the original document is simplex (printed on one page) or duplex (printed on
both sides). This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.
• Orientation— Use this to specify the orientation of the original document, and then change Sides and Binding to
match the orientation.
• Binding— Use this to specify if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge of the page.
Scan Preview
This option displays the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is scanned, the
scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Advanced Options
Touching the Advanced Options button opens a screen where you can change the following settings:
• Advanced Imaging—Use to change or adjust Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG
Quality, Mirror Image, Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings
before scanning a document.
• Custom Job—Use to combine multiple scan jobs into a single scan job.
• Edge Erase—Use to remove smudges or information around the edges of a document. You can choose to eliminate
an equal area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase will erase whatever is within
the area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scanned image.
• Transmission Log—Use to print the transmission log or transmission error log.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
133
Understanding the printer menus
Menus list
Supplies
Paper Menu
Reports
Settings
Replace Supply
Default Source
Paper Size/Type
Configure MP
Substitute Size
Paper Texture
Paper Loading
Custom Types
Custom Names
Custom Scan Sizes
Universal Setup
Bin Setup
Menu Settings Page
Device Statistics
Network Setup Page
Network [x] Setup Page
Shortcut List
General Settings
Copy Settings
Fax Settings
Cyan Cartridge
Magenta Cartridge
Yellow Cartridge
E‑mail Settings
FTP Settings
Black Cartridge
Cyan Photoconductor Unit
Magenta Photoconductor Unit
Yellow Photoconductor Unit
Black Photoconductor Unit
Separator Pick Assembly and Roller
Waste Toner Bottle
Fuser
Fax Job Log
Flash Drive Menu
Print Settings
Fax Call Log
Copy Shortcuts
E-mail Shortcuts
Fax Shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Profiles List
Transfer Module
Print Fonts
Print Directory
Asset Report
Security
Network/Ports
Help
Manage Shortcuts
Edit Security Setups
Miscellaneous Security Settings
Confidential Print
Active NIC
Network1
Print All Guides
Copy Guide
Fax Shortcuts
E-mail Shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Copy Shortcuts
Profile Shortcuts
E-mail Guide
Standard USB
Parallel [x]
Serial [x]
Disk Wiping
Fax Guide
Security Audit Log
Set Date and Time
FTP Guide
Print Defects Guide
Information Guide
Supplies Guide
SMTP Setup
Option Card Menu
A list of installed DLEs (Download Emulators) appears.2
1 Depending on the printer setup, this menu appears as Standard Network or Network [x].
2 This menu appears only when one or more DLEs are installed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
134
Supplies menu
Use
To
Replace Supply
Reset the supply counter for the replacement
photoconductor or photoconductors.
All Photoconductors
Cyan Photoconductor
Magenta Photoconductor
Yellow Photoconductor
Black Photoconductor
• Select Yes to reset the supply counter.
• Select No to exit.
Note: Reset the supply counter manually after replacing a
photoconductor.
Cyan Cartridge
Early Warning
Low
View the status of the cyan toner cartridge.
View the status of the magenta toner cartridge.
View the status of the yellow toner cartridge.
Invalid
Near End of Life
Replace
Missing
Defective
OK
Unsupported
Magenta Cartridge
Early Warning
Low
Invalid
Near End of Life
Replace
Missing
Defective
OK
Unsupported
Yellow Cartridge
Early Warning
Low
Invalid
Near End of Life
Replace
Missing
Defective
OK
Unsupported
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
135
Use
To
Black Cartridge
Early Warning
Low
View the status of the black toner cartridge.
Invalid
Near End of Life
Replace
Missing
Defective
OK
Unsupported
Cyan Photoconductor
View the status of the cyan photoconductor.
View the status of the magenta photoconductor.
View the status of the yellow photoconductor.
View the status of the black photoconductor.
Early Warning
Low
Replace
Missing
OK
Magenta Photoconductor
Early Warning
Low
Replace
Missing
OK
Yellow Photoconductor
Early Warning
Low
Replace
Missing
OK
Black Photoconductor
Early Warning
Low
Replace
Missing
OK
Separator Pick Assembly and Roller
VIew the status of the separator pick assembly and roller.
View the status of the waste toner bottle.
OK
Replace
Waste Toner Bottle
Near Full
Replace
Missing
OK
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
136
Use
To
Fuser
View the status of the fuser.
Early Warning
Low
Replace
Missing
OK
Transfer Module
Early Warning
Low
View the status of the transfer module.
Replace
Missing
OK
Paper menu
Default Source menu
Use
To
Default Source
Tray [x]
Set a default paper source for all print jobs.
Notes:
MP Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
• Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, Configure MP Feeder must be set to Cassette for
MP Feeder to appear as a menu setting.
Paper Size/Type menu
Use
To
Tray [x] Size
A4
Specify the paper size loaded in each tray.
Notes:
A5
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (México)
Folio
• The factory default setting depends on the value of Paper Sizes in the
General Settings menu.
• For trays with automatic paper size sensing, only the size detected by
the tray appears.
Universal
Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
137
Use
To
Tray [x] Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Specify the type of paper loaded in each tray.
Notes:
• Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1. Custom Type [x] is
the factory default setting for all other trays.
• If available, a user‑defined name will appear instead of Custom Type [x].
• Use this menu item to configure automatic tray linking.
Glossy
Heavy Glossy
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
MP Feeder Size
A4
Specify the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
Notes:
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
• Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
• From the Paper menu, Configure MP Feeder must be set to Cassette for
MP Feeder Size to appear as a menu item.
Legal
Executive
Oficio (México)
Folio
Statement
Universal
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
138
Use
To
MP Feeder Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Specify the type of paper loaded in the multipurpose feeder
Notes:
• Custom Type [x] is the factory default setting.
• From the Paper menu, Configure MP Feeder must be set to Cassette for
MP Feeder Type to appear as a menu item.
Glossy
Heavy Glossy
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Envelope
Rough Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Manual Paper Size
A4
Specify the size of the paper being manually loaded.
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
A5
default setting.
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (México)
Folio
Statement
Universal
Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
139
Use
To
Manual Paper Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Specify the type of paper being manually loaded.
Note: Plain paper is the factory default setting.
Glossy
Heavy Glossy
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Roug/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Manual Envelope Size
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
Specify the size of the envelope being manually loaded.
Note: 10 Envelope is the US factory default setting. DL Envelope is the
international factory default setting.
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
Manual Envelope Type
Envelope
Specify the type of envelope being manually loaded.
Note: Envelope is the factory default setting.
Rough Envelope
Custom Type [x]
Note: Only installed trays are listed in this menu.
Configure MP menu
Use
To
Configure MP
Cassette
Manual
Determine when the printer selects paper from the multipurpose feeder.
Notes:
• Cassette is the factory default setting. Cassette configures the
multipurpose feeder as the automatic paper source.
First
• Manual sets the multipurpose feeder only for manual‑feed print jobs.
• First configures the multipurpose feeder as the primary paper source.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
140
Substitute Size menu
Use
To
Substitute Size
Off
Substitute a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available.
Notes:
Statement/A5
Letter/A4
All Listed
• All Listed is the factory default setting. All available substitutions are
allowed.
• Off indicates that no size substitutions are allowed.
• Setting a size substitution lets the print job continue without Change
Paperappearing.
Paper Weight menu
Use
To
Plain Weight
Light
Specify the relative weight of the plain paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Card Stock Weight
Light
Specify the relative weight of the card stock loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Transparency Weight
Specify the relative weight of the transparencies loaded.
Light
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Recycled Weight
Light
Specify the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Glossy Weight
Light
Specify the relative weight of the glossy paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Heavy Glossy Weight
Specify the relative weight of the heavy glossy paper loaded.
Light
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Labels Weight
Light
Specify the relative weight of the labels loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
141
Use
To
Vinyl Labels Weight
Light
Specify the relative weight of the vinyl labels loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Bond Weight
Light
Specify the relative weight of the bond paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Envelope Weight
Light
Specify the relative weight of the envelope loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Rough Envelope Weight
Specify the relative weight of the rough envelope loaded.
Light
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Letterhead Weight
Light
Specify the relative weight of the letterhead loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Preprinted Weight
Light
Specify the relative weight of the preprinted paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Colored Weight
Light
Specify the relative weight of the colored paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Light Weight
Specify the relative weight of the paper loaded.
Specify the relative weight of the paper loaded.
Light
Heavy Weight
Heavy
Rough/Cotton Weight
Specify the relative weight of the cotton paper loaded.
Light
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Normal
Heavy
Custom [x] Weight
Light
Specify the relative weight of the custom paper loaded.
Notes:
Normal
Heavy
• Normal is the factory default setting.
• The options appear only when the custom type is supported.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
142
Paper Loading menu
Use
To
Card Stock Loading
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Card Stock as the paper type.
Duplex
Off
Recycled Loading
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Recycled as the paper type.
Duplex
Off
Glossy Loading
Duplex
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Glossy as the paper type.
Off
Heavy Glossy Loading
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Heavy Glossy as the paper type.
Off
Duplex
Labels Loading
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Labels as the paper type.
Duplex
Vinyl Labels Loading
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Vinyl Labels as the paper type.
Off
Duplex
Bond Loading
Duplex
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Bond as the paper type.
Off
Letterhead Loading
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Letterhead as the paper type.
Duplex
Off
Preprinted Loading
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Preprinted as the paper type.
Duplex
Off
Colored Loading
Duplex
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Colored as the paper type.
Off
Light Loading
Duplex
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Light as the paper type.
Off
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menus.
• Duplex sets the printer default to two‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected from the
Print Properties settings in Windows or from the Print Dialog settings in Macintosh.
• If Duplex is selected, then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit, including one‑sided print jobs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
143
Use
To
Heavy Loading
Duplex
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Heavy as the paper type.
Off
Rough/Cotton Loading
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Rough or Cotton as the paper type.
Duplex
Off
Custom [x] Loading
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Custom [x] as the paper type.
Duplex
Off
Note: Custom [x] Loading is available only if the custom paper type
is supported.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting for all Paper Loading menus.
• Duplex sets the printer default to two‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected from the
Print Properties settings in Windows or from the Print Dialog settings in Macintosh.
• If Duplex is selected, then all print jobs are sent through the duplex unit, including one‑sided print jobs.
Custom Types menu
Use
To
Custom Type [x]
Paper
Associate a paper or specialty media type with a user‑defined custom name
created in the Embedded Web Server or in MarkVisionTM Professional.
Card Stock
Transparency
Glossy
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Envelope
Notes:
• Paper is the factory default setting.
• The custom paper type must be supported in the selected tray or
multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.
Recycled
Paper
Specify a paper type when the Recycled setting is selected in other menus.
Notes:
Card Stock
Transparency
Glossy
• Paper is the factory default setting.
• The custom paper type must be supported in the selected tray or
multipurpose feeder in order to print from that source.
Labels
Vinyl Labels
Envelope
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
144
Custom Scan Sizes menu
Use
To
Custom Scan Size [x]
Scan Size Name
Width
Specify a custom scan size name, scan sizes, and options. The custom scan size
name replaces Custom Scan Size [x] in the printer menus.
Notes:
1–11.69 inches (25–297 mm)
Height
1–17 inches (25–432 mm)
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
2 scans per side
Off
• 11.69 inches is the US factory default setting for Width. 297 millimeters
is the international factory default setting for Width.
• 17 inches is the US factory default setting for Height. 432 millimeters is
the international factory default setting for Height.
• Portrait is the factory default setting for Orientation.
• Off is the factory default setting for “2 scans per side.”
On
Custom Names menu
Use
To
Custom Name [x]
Specify a custom name for a paper type. This name replaces Custom Type [x] in
the printer menus.
[none]
Universal Setup menu
Use
To
Units of Measure
Inches
Specify the unit of measure.
Note: Inches is the US factory default setting. Millimeters is the
Millimeters
international factory default setting.
Portrait Width
3–48 inches
Set the width for a portrait page orientation.
Notes:
76–1219 mm
• 8.5 inches is the US factory default setting. 216 mm is the
international factory default setting.
• If the specified width exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses
the maximum width allowed.
• The width can be increased in 0.01-inch or in 1-mm increments.
Set the height for a portrait page orientation.
Notes:
Portrait Height
3–48 inches
76–1219 mm
• 14 inches is the US factory default setting. 356 mm is the
international factory default setting.
• If the specified height exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses
the maximum height allowed.
• The height can be increased in 0.01-inch or in 1-mm increments.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
145
Use
To
Feed Direction
Short Edge
Specify the feed direction.
Notes:
Long Edge
• Short Edge is the factory default setting.
• Long Edge appears only when the paper or specialty media can be
loaded in either direction.
Reports menu
Reports menu
Use
To
Menu Settings Page
Print a report containing information about the paper loaded in trays, installed
memory, total page count, alarms, timeouts, printer control panel language,
TCP/IP address, status of supplies, status of the network connection, and other
information.
Device Statistics
Print a report containing printer statistics such as supply information and details
about printed pages.
Network Setup Page
Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as
the TCP/IP address.
Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected
to print servers.
Network [x] Setup Page
Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as
the TCP/IP address.
Note: This menu item appears only when there is more than one network
option installed and only in network printers or printers connected to print
servers.
Shortcut List
Fax Job Log
Print a report containing information about configured shortcuts.
Print a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes.
Note: This menu item is available only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the
Fax Settings menu.
Fax Call Log
Print a report containing information about the last 100 attempted, received, and
blocked calls.
Note: This menu item is available only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the
Fax Settings menu.
Copy Shortcuts
E‑mail Shortcuts
Fax Shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Profiles List
Print a report containing information about copy shortcuts.
Print a report containing information about e‑mail shortcuts.
Print a report containing information about fax shortcuts.
Print a report containing information about FTP shortcuts.
Print a list of profiles stored in the printer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
146
Use
To
Print Fonts
Print a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in
the printer.
Print Directory
Asset Report
Print a list of all the resources stored on an optional flash memory card or in
printer hard disk.
Notes:
• Job Buffer Size must be set to 100%.
• Make sure the optional flash memory or printer hard disk is installed
correctly and working.
Print a report containing asset information including the printer serial number
and model name. The report contains text and UPC barcodes that can be scanned
into an asset database.
Network/Ports menu
Active NIC menu
Use
To
Active NIC
Notes:
Auto
• Auto is the factory default setting.
[list of network cards]
• This menu item appears only when an optional network card is installed.
Standard Network or Network [x] menus
Note: Only active ports appear in this menu. All inactive ports are omitted.
Use
To
PCL SmartSwitch
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires
it, regardless of the default printer language.
On
Off
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When Off is used, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default
printer language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
PS SmartSwitch
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires it,
regardless of the default printer language.
On
Off
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When Off is used, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer
uses PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
147
Use
To
NPA Mode
Off
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Auto
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Network Buffer
Auto
Set the size of the network input buffer.
Notes:
3KB to [maximum size allowed]
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• The value can be changed in 1‑KB increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
• To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer, disable or
reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and USB buffers.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buffering
Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing. This menu only
appears when a formatted disk is installed.
Off
On
Notes:
Auto
• Off is the factory default setting.
• On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
• Auto buffers print jobs only when the printer is busy processing data from
another input port.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PS
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
On
Off
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
Auto
• Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
• On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
Standard Network Setup OR
Network [x] Setup
Display and set the printer network settings.
Note: The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless
network.
Reports
Network Card
TCP/IP
IPv6
Wireless
AppleTalk
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
148
Reports menu
To access the menu, navigate to any of the following:
• Network/Ports menu > Networks/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Reports
• Network/Ports menu > Networks/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Reports
Use
To
Print Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address.
Network Card menu
To access the menu, navigate to any of the following:
• Network/Ports menu > Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Network Card
• Network/Ports menu > Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Network Card
Use
To
View Card Status
Connected
View the connection status of the network card.
Disconnected
View Card Speed
View the speed of an active network card.
View the network addresses.
Network Address
UAA
LAA
Job Timeout
Set the amount of time it takes for a network print job to be canceled.
0, 10–255 seconds
Notes:
• 90 seconds is the factory default setting.
• A setting value of 0 disables the timeout.
• If a value of 1–9 is selected, then the setting is saved as 10.
Banner Page
Allow the printer to print a banner page.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
TCP/IP menu
Note: This menu is available only in network models or printers attached to print servers.
To access the menu, navigate to any of the following:
• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup >TCP/IP
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup >TCP/IP
Use
To
Activate
On
Activate or deactivate TCP/IP.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Off
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
149
Use
To
Set Hostname
Set the current TCP/IP host name.
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
IP Address
View or change the current TCP/IP address.
Note: Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP
settings to Off. It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that
support BOOTP and RARP.
Netmask
Gateway
View or change the current TCP/IP netmask.
View or change the current TCP/IP gateway.
Enable DHCP
Specify the DHCP address and parameter assignment setting.
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable RARP
Specify the RARP address assignment setting.
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable BOOTP
Specify the BOOTP address assignment setting.
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable Auto IP
Specify the Zero Configuration Networking setting.
Yes
No
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable FTP/TFTP
Enable the built-in FTP server, which letsyou send files to the printer using File Transfer
Protocol.
Yes
No
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable HTTP Server
Enable the built-in Web server (Embedded Web Server). When enabled, you can
monitor and manage the printer remotely using a Web browser.
Yes
No
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
WINS Server Address
View or change the current WINS server address.
Enable DDNS
View or change the current DDNS setting
Yes
No
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable mDNS
View or change the current mDNS setting.
Yes
No
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
DNS Server Address
View or change the current DNS server address.
Enable HTTPS
View or change the current HTTPS setting.
Yes
No
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
150
IPv6 menu
To access the menu, navigate to any of the following:
• Network/Ports menu > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup >IPv6
• Network/Ports menu > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > IPv6
Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers.
Use
To
Enable IPv6
Enable IPv6 in the printer.
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Auto Configuration
Specify whether or not the network adapter accepts the automatic IPv6
address configuration entries provided by a router.
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Set Hostname
Set the host name.
Note: These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.
View Address
View Router Address
Enable DHCPv6
Enable DHCPv6 in the printer.
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Wireless menu
Note: This menu is available only in printer models connected to a wireless network.
To access the menu, navigate to any of the following:
• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup >Wireless
• Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless
Use
To
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup (WPS)
Start Push Button Method
Start PIN Method
Establish a wireless network and enable network security.
Notes:
• Start Push Button Method connects the printer to a wireless
network by pressing buttons on both the printer and the access
point (wireless router) within a given period of time.
• Start PIN Method connects the printer to a wireless network by
using a PIN on the printer and entering it into the wireless settings
of the access point.
Enable/Disable WPS Auto‑detection
Automatically detect the connection method that an access point with
WPS uses—Start Push Button Method or Start PIN Method.
Enable
Disable
Note: Disable is the factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
151
Use
To
Network Mode
Infrastructure
Ad hoc
Specify the network mode.
Notes:
• Ad hoc is the factory default setting. This configures wireless
connection directly between the printer and a computer.
• Infrastructure lets the printer access a network using an access
point.
Compatibility
802.11b/g
Specify the wireless standard for the wireless network.
Note: The 802.11b/g/n is the factory default setting.
802.11b/g/n
Choose Network
Select an available network for the printer to use.
View the quality of the wireless connection.
View Signal Quality
View Security Mode
View the encryption method for the wireless network.
AppleTalk menu
Note: This menu is available only in printer models connected to a wired network or when an optional network card
is installed.
To access the menu, navigate to any of the following:
• Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > AppleTalk
• Network/Ports > Network Setup [x] > AppleTalk
Use
To
Activate
Yes
Enable or disable AppleTalk support.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
No
View Name
View Address
Set Zone
Show the assigned AppleTalk name.
Note: The name can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
Show the assigned AppleTalk address.
Note: The address can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
Provide a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network.
[list of zones available on the network]
Note: The factory default setting is the default zone for the network. If no
default zone exists, then the zone marked with an asterisk (*) is the default
setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
152
Standard USB menu
Use
To
PCL SmartSwitch
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
On
Off
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default
printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch is set to
Off.
PS SmartSwitch
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
On
Off
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
On
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Off
Notes:
Auto
• Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data,
determine the format, and then process it appropriately.
• The printer automatically restarts when changing the setting from the printer
control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
USB Buffer
Set the size of the USB input buffer.
Disabled
Auto
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
3K to [maximum size allowed]
• Disabled turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the printer hard
disk are printed before normal processing resumes.
• The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1-K increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
• To increase the maximum size range for the USB Buffer, disable or reduce the
size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.
• The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the printer
control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
153
Use
To
Job Buffering
Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing.
Off
On
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
Auto
• On buffers jobs on the printer hard disk.
• Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another
input port.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PS
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
On
Off
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
Auto
• On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
• Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
ENA Address
Set the network address information for an external print server.
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
ENA Netmask
Set the netmask information for an external print server.
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
ENA Gateway
Set the gateway information for an external print server.
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
Parallel [x] menu
Note: This menu appears only when an optional parallel card is installed.
Use
To
PCL SmartSwitch
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
On
Off
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
154
Use
To
PS SmartSwitch
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
On
Off
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
On
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Off
Notes:
Auto
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Parallel Buffer
Set the size of the parallel input buffer.
Disabled
Auto
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
3K to [maximum size allowed]
• Disabled turns off job buffering. Any print jobs already buffered on the printer
hard disk are printed before normal processing resumes.
• The parallel buffer size setting can be changed in 1‑KB increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
• To increase the maximum size range for the Parallel Buffer, disable or reduce
the size of the USB, serial, and network buffers.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Job Buffering
Temporarily store print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing.
Off
On
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
Auto
• Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another
input port.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Advanced Status
Enable bidirectional communication through the parallel port.
On
Off
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• Off disables parallel port negotiation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
155
Use
To
Protocol
Standard
Fastbytes
Specify the parallel port protocol.
Notes:
• Fastbytes is the factory default setting. It provides compatibility with most
existing parallel ports and is the recommended setting.
• Standard tries to resolve parallel port communication problems.
Honor Init
On
Determine if the printer honors printer hardware initialization requests from the
computer.
Off
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• The computer requests initialization by activating the Init signal from the
parallel port. Many personal computers activate the Init signal each time the
computer is turned on.
Parallel Mode 2
Determine if the parallel port data is sampled on the leading or trailing edge of a
strobe.
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
Notes:
Mac Binary PS
On
Off
Auto
• Auto is the factory default setting.
• Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
• On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
ENA Address
Set the network address information for an external print server.
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
ENA Netmask
Set the netmask information for an external print server.
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
ENA Gateway
Set the gateway information for an external print server.
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Note: This menu item is available only if the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
Serial [x] menu
Note: This menu appears only when an optional serial card is installed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
156
Use
To
PCL SmartSwitch
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
On
Off
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PostScript emulation if PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PS SmartSwitch is set to Off.
PS SmartSwitch
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a serial port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
On
Off
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PCL emulation if PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
On
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Off
Notes:
Auto
• Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data,
determine the format, and then processes it appropriately.
• When set to On, the printer performs NPA processing. If the data is not in NPA
format, it is rejected as bad data.
• When set to Off, the printer does not perform NPA processing.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Serial Buffer
Set the size of the serial input buffer.
Disabled
Auto
Notes:
• Auto is the factory default setting.
3K to [maximum size allowed]
• Disabled turns off job buffering. Any jobs already buffered on the disk are
printed before normal processing is resumed.
• The serial buffer size setting can be changed in 1‑KB increments.
• The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
• To increase the maximum size range for the Serial Buffer, disable or reduce
the size of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
157
Use
To
Job Buffering
Temporarily store print jobs on the printer hard disk before printing.
Off
On
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. The printer does not buffer print jobs on the
printer hard disk.
Auto
• On buffers print jobs on the printer hard disk.
• Auto buffers print jobs only if the printer is busy processing data from another
input port.
• Changing this setting from the printer control panel and then exiting the
menus causes the printer to restart. The menu selection is then updated.
Protocol
Select the hardware and software handshaking settings for the serial port.
DTR
DTR/DSR
Notes:
• DTR is the factory default setting.
• DTR/DSR is a hardware handshaking setting.
• XON/XOFF is a software handshaking setting.
XON/XOFF
XON/XOFF/DTR
XONXOFF/DTRDSR
• XON/XOFF/DTR and XON/XOFF/DTR/DSR are combined hardware and
software handshaking settings.
Robust XON
Determine whether the printer communicates availability to the computer.
On
Off
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item applies only to the serial port if Serial Protocol is set to
XON/XOFF.
Baud
Specify the rate at which data can be received through the serial port.
1200
2400
Notes:
• 9600 is the factory default setting.
4800
• 138200, 172800, 230400, and 345600 baud rates are only displayed in the
Standard Serial menu. These settings do not appear in the Serial Option 1,
Serial Option 2, or Serial Option 3 menus.
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
138200
172800
230400
345600
Data Bits
Specify the number of data bits sent in each transmission frame.
7
8
Note: 8 is the factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
158
Use
To
Parity
Even
Set the parity for serial input and output data frames.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Odd
None
Ignore
Honor DSR
Determine whether the printer uses the DSR Signal.
On
Off
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• DSR is a handshaking signal used by most serial cables. The serial port uses
DSR to distinguish data sent by the computer from data created by electrical
noise in the serial cable. The electrical noise can cause stray characters to
print. Set this to On to prevent stray characters from printing.
SMTP Setup menu
Use
To
Primary SMTP Gateway
Primary SMTP Gateway Port
Secondary SMTP Gateway
Secondary SMTP Gateway Port
Specify SMTP server gateway and port information.
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.
SMTP Timeout
Specify the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying to
send an e‑mail.
5–30
Note: 30 is the factory default setting.
Reply Address
Specify a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e-mail sent by the
printer.
Use SSL
Set the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to the
SMTP server.
Disabled
Negotiate
Required
Notes:
• Disabled is the factory default setting.
• Negotiate lets the SMTP server determine if SSL is used.
SMTP Server Authentication
No authentication required
Login/Plain
Specify the type of user authentication required for “scan to e‑mail”
privileges.
Note: “No authentication required” is the factory default setting.
CRAM‑MD5
Digest‑MD5
NTLM
Kerberos 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
159
Use
To
Device‑Initiated E‑mail
None
Specify what credentials will be used when communicating to the SMTP
server. Some SMTP servers require credentials to send an e-mail.
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Notes:
User‑Initiated E‑mail
• None is the factory default setting for Device‑Initiated E‑mail and
None
User‑Initiated E‑mail.
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Use Session User ID & Password
Use Session E‑mail address & Password
Prompt User
• Device Userid and Device Password are used to log in to the SMTP
server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is selected.
Device Userid
Device Password
Kerberos 5 Realm
NTLM Domain
Security menu
Edit Security Setups menu
Use
To
Edit Backup Password
Create a backup password.
Note: This menu item appears only when a backup password exists.
Edit Building Blocks
Edit Security Templates
Edit Access Controls
Edit the internal accounts, NTLM, various setups, password, and PIN.
Add or edit a security template.
Control access to printer menus, firmware updates, held jobs, and other access
points.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
160
Miscellaneous Security Settings menu
Use
To
Login Restrictions
Login failures
Limit the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control
panel before all users are locked out.
Failure time frame
Lockout time
Panel Login Timeout
Remote Login Timeout
Notes:
• “Login failures” specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are
locked out. Settings range from 1–10 attempts. 3 attempts is the factory
default setting.
• “Failure time frame” specifies the time frame during which failed login
attempts can be made before users are locked out. Settings range from 1–60
minutes. 5 minutes is the factory default setting.
• “Lockout time” specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the
login failures limit. Settings range from 1–60 minutes. 5 minutes is the factory
default setting. 1 indicates the printer does not impose a lockout time.
• “Panel Login Timeout” specifies how long the printer remains idle on the home
screen before automatically logging off the user. Settings range from 1–900
seconds. 30 seconds is the factory default setting.
• “Remote Login Timeout” specifies how long a remote interface remains idle
before automatically logging off the user. Settings range from 1–120 minutes.
10 minutes is the factory default setting.
Security Reset Jumper
Access controls=”No Security”
No Effect
Adjust the security settings.
Notes:
• “Access controls=’No Security’” retains all the security information that the
user has defined. “No Security" is the factory default setting.
Reset factory security defaults
• “No Effect” means the reset has no effect on the printer security
configuration.
• “Reset factory security defaults” deletes all security information that the user
has defined, and restores the factory default settings in the Miscellaneous
Security menu.
LDAP Certificate Verification
Allow the user to request a server certificate.
Demand
Try
Allow
Never
Notes:
• “Demand” means a server certificate is requested. If a bad certificate is
provided or if no certificate is provided, then the session is terminated
immediately. “Demand” is the factory default setting.
• “Try” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided, then
the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, then the session
is terminated immediately.
• “Allow” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided,
then the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, then it will
be ignored and the session proceeds normally.
• “Never” means no server certificate is requested.
Minimum PIN Length
Limit the digit length of the personal identification number (PIN).
1–16
Note: 4 is the is the factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
161
Confidential Print menu
Use
To
Max Invalid PIN
Limit the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Off
2–10
Notes:
• This menu appears only when a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed.
• Once the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration Limit the amount of time a confidential print job stays in the printer before it is deleted.
Off
1 hour
Notes:
• If the “Confidential Job Expiration” setting is changed while confidential print jobs
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
reside in the printer RAM or printer hard disk, then the expiration time for those print
jobs does not change to the new default value.
• If the printer is turned off, then all confidential jobs held in the printer RAM are
deleted.
Repeat Job Expiration
Set a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs.
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Verify Job Expiration
Off
Set a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs needing verification.
Set a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs for printing at a later time.
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Reserve Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Disk Wiping menu
Disk Wiping erases only print job data in the printer hard disk that are not currently in use by the file system. All
permanent data in the printer hard disk are retained, such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.
Note: This menu item appears only when a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
162
Use
To
Wiping Mode
Off
Specify the mode for disk wiping.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer determines when to initiate a
Auto
disk wipe.
Manual
Scheduled Wiping
Set the schedule for disk wiping.
Time
Day
Notes:
• Time is used to set the time for scheduled wiping.
• Day is used to set the specific day or period for scheduled wiping. Select from
the following options: Sunday to Friday, Everyday, Weekdays, and Weekends.
• Scheduled wipes are initiated without displaying a user warning or
confirmation message.
• Both manual and scheduled wiping allow the file system to reuse marked disk
space without first having to wipe it.
Manual Wiping
Start now
Overwrite the disk space that has been used to hold data from a processed print job.
This type of wiping does not erase any information related to an unprocessed print
job.
Do not start now
Notes:
• “Do not start now“ is the factory default setting.
• If the Disk Wiping access control is activated, then a user must successfully
authenticate and have the required authorization in order to initiate the disk
wipe.
Automatic Method
Single pass
Mark the disk space used by a previous print job. This method does not permit the
file system to reuse this space until it has been cleared.
Multiple pass
Notes:
• “Single pass” is the factory default setting.
• Only automatic wiping enables users to activate disk wiping without having to
turn the printer off for an extended amount of time.
• Wipe highly confidential information using only the Multiple pass method.
Allow the file system to reuse marked disk space without having to wipe it first.
Notes:
Manual Method
Single pass
Multiple pass
• “Single pass” is the factory default setting.
• Highly confidential information should be wiped using the Multiple pass
method only.
Scheduled Method
Single pass
Allow the file system to reuse marked disk space without having to wipe it first.
Note: “Single pass” is the factory default setting.
Multiple pass
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
163
Security Audit Log menu
Use
To
Export Log
Enable an authorized user to export the security log.
Notes:
• To export the log from the printer control panel, attach a flash drive to the printer.
• To export the log from the Embedded Web Server, download the log to a computer.
Delete Log
Yes
Specify whether audit logs are deleted.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
No
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
164
Use
To
Configure Log
Specify whether and how the audit logs are created.
Enable Audit
Notes:
Yes
• “Enable Audit” determines if events are recorded in the secure audit log and remote syslog. No is the
No
factory default setting.
Enable Remote Syslog
• “Enable Remote Syslog” determines if logs are sent to a remote server. No is the factory default
setting.
Yes
No
• “Remote Syslog Server” determines the value used to send logs to the remote syslog server. 4 is the
factory default setting.
Remote Syslog Server
[256 character string]
Remote Syslog Port
1–65535
Remote Syslog Method
Normal UDP
Stunnel
Remote Syslog Facility
0–23
Log full behavior
• “Remote Syslog Port” identifies the port over which the printer transmits logged events to a remote
server.
• “Remote Syslog Method” identifies the protocol used by the printer to transmit logged events to a
remote server. Normal UDP is the factory default setting.
• “Remote Syslog Facility” determines the Facility value that the printer uses when sending events to
the remote syslog server. 4 is the factory default setting.
• “Log full behavior” determines how the printer resolves if the log entirely fills its allotted memory.
“Wrap over oldest entries” is the factory default setting.
• The value of the “Admin’s e‑mail address setting can be a single e‑mail address or a comma‑delimited
Wrap over oldest entries
list of e‑mail addresses.
E‑mail log then delete all entries
• “Digitally sign exports” determines if the printer automatically signs each exported security log. Off is
the factory default setting.
Admin’s e-mail address
[256 character string]
Digitally sign exports
• “Severity of events to log” records the severity value of each event. 4 is the factory default setting.
• “Remote Syslog non-logged events” determines if the printer sends events to the remote server that
have a severity level greater than the value of the “Severity of events to log” setting. No is the factory
default setting.
Off
On
Severity of events to log
• “E-mail log cleared alert” determines if the printer sends an e‑mail to the administrator every time a
0–7
log is deleted via printer control panel or EWS. No is the factory default setting.
Remote Syslog non-logged events
• “E-mail log wrapped alert” determines if the printer sends the administrator an e‑mail when log
No
Yes
entries are wrapping. No is the factory default setting.
• “% full alert level” determines if the space occupied by log equals or exceeds the value of the full alert
level. 90 is the factory default setting.
E-mail log cleared alert
No
Yes
• “E-mail % full alert” determines if the printer sends the administrator an e‑mail when the log fills a
certain amount of its allotted space. No is the factory default setting.
E-mail log wrapped alert
• “E-mail log exported alert” determines if the printer sends the administrator an e‑mail when there is a
No
log exported. No is the factory default setting.
Yes
• “E-mail log settings changed alert” determines if the printer sends the administrator an e‑mail when
E-mail % full alert
the value of the Enable Audit Log setting is toggled.
No
Yes
% full alert level
1–99
E-mail log exported alert
No
Yes
E-mail log settings changed alert
No
Yes
Log line endings
LF (\n)
CR (\r)
CRLF (\r\n)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
165
Set Date and Time menu
Use
To
Current Date and Time
Manually Set Date and Time
View the current date and time settings for the printer.
Enter the date and time.
Notes:
• Date/Time is set in YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS format.
• Manually setting the date and time sets Enable NTP to No.
Time Zone
Select the time zone.
Note: GMT is the factory default setting.
Automatically Observe DST
Set the printer to use the applicable daylight saving time (DST) start and end times
associated with the printer Time Zone setting.
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting and uses the applicable Daylight Saving Time
associated with the Time Zone setting.
Custom Time Zone Setup
UTC Offset
Select the time zone.
DST Start Week
DST Start DayOff
DST Start Month
DST Start Time
DST End Week
DST End Day
DST End Month
DST End Time
DST Offset
Enable NTP
Enable or disable Network Time Protocol, which synchronizes the clocks of printers
on a network.
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting.
View the NTP server address.
Change the authentication setting to On or Off.
Notes:
NTP Server
Enable Authentication
Off
On
• Off is the factory default setting.
• If the authentication setting is enabled, then the printer will ask for the user
credentials, such as user ID and password.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
166
Settings menu
General Settings menu
Use
To
Display Language
English
Set the language of the text appearing on the printer display.
Note: Not all languages are available for all printers, and you may
Francais
Deutsch
need to install special hardware for those languages to appear.
Italiano
Espanol
Greek
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Portuguese
Suomi
Russian
Polski
Magyar
Turkce
Cesky
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Korean
Japanese
Eco-Mode
Off
Minimize the use of energy, paper, or specialty media.
Notes:
Energy
Energy/Paper
Paper
• Off is the factory default setting. Off resets the printer to its
factory default settings.
• The Energy setting minimizes the power used by the printer.
Performance may be affected, but print quality is not.
• Energy/Paper minimizes the use of power and of paper and
specialty media.
• Paper minimizes the amount of paper and specialty media
needed for a print job. Performance may be affected, but
print quality is not.
ADF Loaded Beep
Enabled
Specify whether or not the ADF sounds a beep when paper is
loaded.
Disabled
Note: Disabled is the factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
167
Use
To
Quiet Mode
Reduce the amount of noise produced by the printer.
Off
On
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. This setting supports the
performance specifications for your printer.
• “On” configures the printer to produce as little noise as
possible. This setting is best suited for printing text and line
art.
• For optimal printing of color‑rich documents, set Quiet Mode
to Off.
• Selecting Photo from the printer driver may disable Quiet
Mode and provide better print quality and full speed
printing.
Run Initial setup
Run the setup wizard.
Notes:
Yes
No
• Yes is the factory default setting.
• After completing the setup wizard by selecting Done at the
“Country select” screen, the default becomes No.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
168
Use
To
Keyboard
Keyboard Type
English
Specify a language and custom key information for the printer
keyboard. The additional tabs enable access to accent marks and
symbols from the keyboard.
Francais
Francais Canadien
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Greek
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Suomi
Portuguese
Russian
Polski
Swiss German
Swiss French
Turkce
Korean
Custom Key [x]
Accents/Symbols Tab
On
Off
Russian/Polish Tab
On
Off
Korean Tab
On
Off
Paper Sizes
US
Specify the default paper measurement.
Notes:
Metric
• Initial setting is determined by your country or region
selection in the initial setup wizard.
• Changing this setting also changes the default for each input
source in the Paper Size/Paper Type menu.
Scan to PC Port Range
Specify a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking
firewall. The valid ports are specified by two sets of numbers
separated by a semicolon.
[port range]
Note: 9751:12000 is the factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
169
Use
To
Displayed Information
Left side
Specify what is displayed on the upper left and right corners of the
home screen.
For the Left side and Right side menus, select from the following
options:
Right side
Custom Text [x]
[text entry]
[x] Cartridge
[x] Photoconductor
Fuser
None
IP Address
Hostname
Contact Name
Location
Transfer Module
Date/Time
mDNS/DDNS Service Name
Zero Configuration Name
Cartridge Level
Custom Text [x]
For [x] Cartridge, [x] Photoconductor, Fuser, and Transfer Module
menus, select from the following options:
When to display
Do not display
Display
Message to Display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Notes:
• IP Address is the factory default setting for Left side.
• Date/Time is the factory default setting for Right side.
• Off is the factory default setting for Display When Supply
Registers.
• Default is the factory default setting for Type of Message to
Display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
170
Use
To
Displayed Information (continued)
Waste Toner Bottle
Paper Jam
Specify what is displayed for Paper Jam, Load Paper, and Service
Errors settings.
Select from the following options:
Activate
Load Paper
Yes
Service Errors
No
Type of Message to Display
Default
Alternate
Default Message
[text entry]
Alternate Message
[text entry]
Notes:
• No is the factory default setting for Activate.
• Default is the factory default setting for Type of Message to
Display.
Home screen customization
Change Language
Copy
Add or remove icons and buttons that appear on the home screen.
For each icon or button, select from the following options:
Display
Copy Shortcuts
Fax
Do Not Display
Fax Shortcuts
E‑mail
E‑mail Shortcuts
FTP
FTP Shortcuts
Search Held Jobs
Held Jobs
USB Drive
Profiles and Solutions
Bookmarks
Jobs by user
Forms and Favorites
Date Format
MM‑DD‑YYYY
DD‑MM‑YYYY
YYYY‑MM‑DD
Format the printer date.
Time Format
Format the printer time.
12 hour A.M./P.M.
24 hour clock
Screen Brightness
Specify the brightness of the printer control panel screen.
20–100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
171
Use
To
One Page Copy
Set copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a time.
On
Off
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Output Lighting
Set the amount of light you want from the standard bin or an
optional output bin.
Standard Bin LED
Normal/Standby Mode
Notes:
Bright
Dim
Off
• In Normal/Standby Mode, the factory default setting is
Bright.
• In Power Saver Mode, the factory default setting is Dim.
Power Saver
Bright
Dim
• This menu item appears only when an integrated output
light is present or when an optional output bin with an
indicator light is installed.
Off
Audio Feedback
Set the audio volume for the buttons.
Button Feedback
Notes:
On
Off
• On is the factory default setting for Button Feedback.
• 5 is the factory default setting for Volume.
Volume
1–10
Show Bookmarks
Specify whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs area.
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting. When On is selected,
bookmarks appear in the Held Jobs area.
Allow Background Removal
Specify whether image background removal is allowed in copy, fax,
e‑mail, FTP, or scan‑to‑USB jobs.
Note: On is the factory default setting. The background of the
On
Off
image will be removed.
Allow Custom Job Scans
Scan multiple jobs to one file.
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting. If On is selected, then the
Allow Custom Job Scans setting can be enabled for specific jobs.
Scanner Jam Recovery
Job level
Specify how a scanned job should be reloaded if a paper jam occurs
in the ADF.
Page level
Notes:
• Job level is the factory default setting.
• If Job level is selected, then the entire job must be rescanned
if any pages jam.
• If Page level is selected, then rescan from the jammed page
forward.
Web Page Refresh Rate
Specify the number of seconds between Embedded Web Server
refreshes.
30–300
Note: 120 is the factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
172
Use
To
Contact Name
Specify a contact name for the printer.
Note: The contact name will be stored on the Embedded Web
Server.
Location
Specify the location of the printer.
Note: The location will be stored on the Embedded Web Server.
Alarms
Set an alarm to sound when the printer requires operator
intervention.
Alarm Control
Cartridge Alarm
For each alarm type, select from the following options:
Off
Single
Continuous
Notes:
• Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control. Single
sounds three quick beeps.
• Off is the factory default setting for Cartridge Alarm. Off
means no alarm will sound.
• Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds.
Timeouts
Standby Mode
Disabled
Specify the number of minutes of inactivity before the printer
enters a lower power state.
Note: 15 is the factory default setting.
1–240
Timeouts
Sleep Mode
1–180
Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits after a job is
printed before it goes into a reduced power state.
Notes:
• 30 is the factory default setting.
• Lower settings conserve more energy, but may require
longer warm‑up times.
• Select the lowest setting if the printer shares an electrical
circuit with room lighting or you notice lights flickering in the
room.
• Select a high setting if the printer is in constant use. Under
most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to print
with minimum warm‑up time.
Timeouts
Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits before
returning the printer display to a Ready state.
Screen Timeout
15–300
Note: 30 is the factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
173
Use
To
Timeouts
Print Timeout
Disabled
Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive an
end‑of‑job message before canceling the remainder of the print
job.
1–255
Notes:
• 90 is the factory default setting.
• When the timer expires, any partially printed page still in the
printer is printed, and then the printer checks to see if any
new print jobs are waiting.
• Print Timeout is available only when using PCL emulation.
This setting has no effect on PostScript emulation print jobs.
Timeouts
Wait Timeout
Disabled
Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for additional
data before canceling a print job.
Notes:
15–65535
• 40 is the factory default setting.
• Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using
PostScript emulation. This setting has no effect on PCL
emulation print jobs.
Timeouts
Set the amount of time the printer waits for user intervention
before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources and
continues to print other jobs in the print queue.
Job Hold Timeout
5–255
Notes:
• 30 is the factory default setting.
• This menu appears only when a printer hard disk is installed.
Print Recovery
Disabled
Let the printer automatically continue printing from certain offline
situations when not resolved within the specified time period.
Auto Continue
5–255
Note: Disabled is the factory default setting.
Print Recovery
Specify whether the printer reprints jammed pages.
Jam Recovery
Notes:
Auto
On
• Auto is the factory default setting. The printer reprints
jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the
pages is needed for other printer tasks.
Off
• On sets the printer to always reprint jammed pages.
• Off sets the printer to never reprint jammed pages.
Print Recovery
Page Protect
Off
Print a page that may not have printed otherwise.
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. Off prints a partial page
when there is not enough memory to print the whole page.
On
• On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the
entire page prints.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
174
Use
To
Press Sleep Button
Sleep
Determine how the printer responds when pressing the Sleep
button when the printer is idle.
Hibernate
Notes:
Do Nothing
• Sleep is the factory default setting.
• Sleep or Hibernate sets the printer to operate at a lower
power configuration.
• If the printer is in Sleep Mode, then the touch screen
appears off and the Sleep button turns amber in color.
• Touch anywhere on the touch screen or press a button on
the printer control panel to exit Sleep Mode.
• If the printer is in Hibernate mode, then the touch screen is
completely off and the Sleep button turns amber in color and
is blinking.
Press and Hold Sleep Button
Do Nothing
Determine how the printer responds when pressing the Sleep
button when the printer is idle.
Sleep
Notes:
Hibernate
• Do Nothing is the factory default setting.
• Sleep or Hibernate sets the printer to operate at a lower
power configuration.
• If the printer is in Sleep Mode, then the touch screen
appears off and the Sleep button turns amber in color.
• Press and hold the Sleep button for 3 seconds or longer to
enter Hibernate mode.
• Touch anywhere on the touch screen or press a button on
the printer control panel to exit Sleep Mode.
Factory Defaults
Do Not Restore
Restore Now
Return the printer settings to the factory default settings.
Notes:
• Do Not Restore is the factory default setting. Do Not Restore
keeps the user‑defined settings.
• Restore Now returns all printer settings to the factory
default settings except Network/Ports menu settings. All
downloads stored in RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in
flash memory or on a printer hard disk are not affected.
Copy Settings menu
Use
To
Content Type
Text
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
175
Use
To
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Color
On
Specify whether or not copies are printed in color.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Off
Allow color copies
Enable or disable color in copying.
On
Off
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• Setting this to Off will hide all color‑specific menus.
• This setting overrides the Color setting.
Sides (Duplex)
Specify whether an original document is two‑sided (duplex) or one‑sided (simplex),
and then to specify whether the copy should be two‑sided or one‑sided.
1 sided to 1 sided
1 sided to 2 sided
2 sided to 1 sided
2 sided to 2 sided
Notes:
• 1 sided to 1 sided—The original document has print on one side and the copy
will also have print on one side.
• 1 sided to 2 sided—The original document has print on one side, while the
copy will have print on both sides.
• 2 sided to 1 sided—The original document has print on both sides, while the
copy will have print on just one side.
• 2 sided to 2 sided—The original document has print on both sides, and the
copy will also have print on both sides.
Paper Saver
Off
Allow copying of two or four sheets of a document on one page.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
2–up Portrait
4–up Portrait
2–up Landscape
4–up Landscape
Print Page Borders
Specify whether or not a border is printed.
On
Off
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Collate
Keep the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies.
Off [1,1,1,2,2,2]
On [1,2,1,2,1,2]
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
176
Use
To
Original Size
Letter
Specify the paper size of the original document.
Notes:
Legal
Executive
Folio
• Letter is the US factory default setting.
• A4 is the international factory default setting.
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5
4 x 6
ID Card
Copy To Source
Tray [x]
Specify the paper source for copy jobs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Auto Size Match
Manual Feeder
Transparency Separators
Place a sheet of paper between transparencies.
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheets
Off
Place a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobs.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Specify the separator sheet source.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Manual Feeder
Darkness
Specify the level of darkness for the copy job.
1–9
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Number of Copies
Specify the number of copies for the copy job.
1–999
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
177
Use
To
Header/Footer
[Location]
Specify header and footer information and its location on the page.
For the location, select from the following options:
Off
• Top left
Date/Time
Page number
Custom text
Print on
• Top middle
• Top right
• Bottom left
• Bottom middle
• Bottom right
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Custom text
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting for the location.
• “All pages” is the factory default setting for “Print on.”
Overlay
Confidential
Copy
Specify the overlay text printed on each page of the copy job.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Draft
Urgent
Custom
Off
Custom Overlay
Specify the custom overlay text.
Note: A maximum of 64 characters is allowed.
Allow priority copies
Allow interruption of a print job to copy a page or document.
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Custom Job scanning
Copy in a single copy job, a document that contains mixed paper sizes.
Off
On
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu appears only when a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is
installed.
Allow Save as Shortcut
Save custom copy settings as shortcuts.
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Background Removal
Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.
‑4 to 4
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Auto Center
Automatically center the content on the page.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
178
Use
To
Color Dropout
Specify which color to drop during copies, and how much to increase or decrease the
dropout.
Color Dropout
None
Notes:
Red
Green
Blue
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Contrast
0–5
Specify the contrast used for the copy job.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Best for content
Mirror Image
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
Create a negative image of the original document.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy.
‑4 to 4
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge
Specify if the original document is scanned edge-to‑edge.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
Adjust the amount of sharpness of a copy.
1–5
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature
Enable the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer
output than the default, while “warm” values generate a redder output than the
default.
‑4 to 4
Sample Copy
Create a sample copy of the original document.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Fax Settings menu
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) menu
Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job through a telephone line.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
179
General Fax Settings
Use
To
Fax Name or Station Name
Fax Number or Station Number
Specify the name of the fax in the printer.
Specify the number assigned to the fax.
Specify how the fax is identified.
Station ID
Fax Name or Station Name
Fax Number or Station Number
Enable Manual Fax
Set the printer to fax manually only, which requires a line splitter and a telephone
handset.
Off
On
Notes:
• Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax
number.
• Touch # 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax function.
Define the allocation of non-volatile memory between sending and receiving fax jobs.
Notes:
Memory Use
Equal
Mostly sent
All send
All receive
Mostly receive
• “Equal” is the factory default setting. Equal splits the memory for sending and
receiving fax jobs into equal amounts.
• “Mostly sent” specifies that most of the memory is set to send fax jobs.
• “All send” specifies that all the memory is set to send fax jobs.
• “All receive” specifies that all the memory is set to receive fax jobs.
• “Mostly receive” specifies that most of the memory is set to receive fax jobs.
Cancel Faxes
Allow
Specify whether or not the printer cancels fax jobs.
Don't Allow
Caller ID
On
Specify the type of caller ID being used.
Off
Alternate
Fax number masking
Off
Specify the direction from where digits are masked in an outgoing fax number.
Note: The number of characters masked is determined by the “Digits to mask”
From left
setting.
From right
Digits to mask
Specify the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number.
0–58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
180
Use
To
Fax Cover Page
Fax Cover Page
Off by default
On by default
Never use
Always use
Include to field
On
Configure the fax cover page.
Note: “Off by default” is the factory default setting for all Fax Cover Page options.
Off
Include from field
Off
On
From
Include Message field
Off
On
Message
Include Logo
Off
On
Include Footer [x]
Footer [x]
Fax Send Settings
Use
To
Resolution
Specify quality in dots per inch (dpi). A higher resolution gives better print quality, but
increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes.
Standard
Fine 200 dpi
Note: Standard is the factory default setting.
Super Fine 300 dpi
Ultra Fine 600 dpi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
181
Use
To
Original Size
Mixed Sizes
Letter
Specify the paper size of the original document.
Note: Mixed Sizes is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]l
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Specify how text and graphics are oriented on a page.
Notes:
Long edge
Short edge
• Off is the factory default setting.
• “Long edge” assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape).
• “Short edge” assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
Content Type
Text
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text is the factory default setting.
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Content Source
Color Laser
Inkjet
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Black and White Laser
Darkness
Lighten or darken the output.
1–9
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Dial Prefix
Enter a dialing prefix, such as 99. A numeric entry field is provided.
Establish a dialing prefix rule.
Dialing Prefix Rules
Prefix Rule [x]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
182
Use
To
Automatic Redial
Specify the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified number.
0–9
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Redial Frequency
Specify the number of minutes between redials.
1–200
Behind a PABX
Enable or disable switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone.
No
Yes
Enable ECM
Enable or disable Error Correction Mode for fax jobs.
Fax files that are scanned at the printer.
Yes
No
Enable Fax Scans
On
Off
Driver to fax
Allow the printer driver to send fax jobs.
Yes
No
Allow Save as Shortcut
Save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer.
Specify the dialing sound, either as a tone or a pulse.
Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent.
On
Off
Dial Mode
Tone
Pulse
Max Speed
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
Custom Job scanning
Scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file.
Specify whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs.
Off
On
Scan Preview
Off
On
Background Removal
Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.
‑4 to 4
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Enable an equal balance of colors in the scanned image.
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
183
Use
To
Color Dropout
Specify which color to drop, and how much to increase or decrease the dropout.
Color Dropout
Notes:
None
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
Red
Green
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Contrast
Best for content
0–5
Specify the contrast in the scanned image.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
Create a negative image of the original document.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible.
‑4 to 4
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge
Specify if the original document is scanned edge-to‑edge prior to faxing.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
Adjust the sharpness of a fax.
0–5
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature
Enable the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer
output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the
default.
‑4 to 4
Enable Color Fax Scans
Off by default
On by default
Never use
Enable color faxing.
Note: “Off by default” is the factory default setting.
Always use
Auto Convert Color Faxes to Mono Convert all outgoing faxes to black and white.
Faxes
Note: On is the factory default setting.
On
Off
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
184
Fax Receive Settings
Use
To
Enable Fax Receive
Allow the printer to receive fax jobs.
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Fax Job Waiting
None
Remove fax jobs that request specific unavailable resources from the print queue.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Toner
Toner and Supplies
Rings to Answer
Specify the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job.
1–25
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Auto Reduction
Scale an incoming fax job so that it fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated
fax source.
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Paper Source
Auto
Specify the paper source selected to supply paper for the printer to print an incoming
fax.
Tray [x]
Multi‑Purpose Feeder
Sides (Duplex)
Enable two‑sided (duplex) printing for incoming fax jobs.
Off
On
Separator Sheets
Off
Enable the printer to include separator sheets for incoming fax jobs.
Before Job
After Job
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Specify where the printer will pick the separator sheet.
Manual Feeder
Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Specify an exit bin for received faxes.
Note: Bin 1 is available only when a finisher is installed.
Fax Footer
Off
Print the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received fax.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
On
Max Speed
2400
Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received.
4800
9600
14400
33600
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
185
Use
To
Fax Forwarding
Print
Enable forwarding of received faxes to another recipient.
Print and Forward
Forward
Forward to
Fax
Specify the type of recipient to which faxes will be forwarded.
Note: This menu is available only from the Embedded Web Server.
E‑mail
FTP
LDSS
eSF
Forward to Shortcut
Enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type (Fax, E-mail, FTP, LDSS,
or eSF).
Block No Name Fax
Enable blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID specified.
Off
On
Banned Fax List
Enable the list of banned fax numbers stored in the printer.
Enable fax holding all of the time or according to set schedule.
Notes:
Holding Faxes
Held Fax Mode
Off
• Off is the factory default setting.
Always On
Manual
Scheduled
Fax Holding Schedule
Enable Color Fax Receive
Enable the printer to receive fax in color.
On
Off
Fax Log Settings
Use
To
Transmission Log
Print log
Enable printing of a transmission log after each fax job.
Do not print log
Print only for error
Receive Error Log
Print Never
Enable printing of a receive error log following a receive error.
Print on Error
Auto Print Logs
Enable automatic printing of fax logs.
On
Off
Note: Logs print after every 200 fax jobs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
186
Use
To
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Specify the source of the paper used for printing logs.
Manual Feeder
Logs Display
Specify whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station name returned.
Remote Fax Name or Remote
Station Name
Dialed Number
Enable Job Log
Enable access to the Fax Job log.
Enable access to the Fax Call log.
On
Off
Enable Call Log
On
Off
Speaker Settings
Use
To
Speaker Mode
On until Connected
Always On
Specify the mode of the speaker.
Notes:
• “On until Connected” is the factory default setting. A sound is issued until the
Always Off
fax connection is made.
• Always On turns the speaker on.
• Always Off turns the speaker off.
Speaker Volume
Control the volume setting.
High
Low
Note: High is the factory default setting.
Ringer Volume
Control the fax speaker ringer volume.
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Answer On
Use
To
All Rings
Specify ring patterns when the printer is answering calls.
Single Ring Only
Note: All Rings is the factory default setting.
Double Ring Only
Triple Ring Only
Single or Double Rings Only
Single or Triple Rings Only
Double or Triple Rings Only
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
187
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup) menu
Fax Server mode sends the fax job to a fax server for transmission.
To access the menu from the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Fax Settings > Fax Server Setup
Fax Server Setup
Use
To
To Format
Specify the information using the virtual keyboard on the printer control panel.
Reply Address
Subject
Message
SMTP Setup
Specify the SMTP setup information.
Primary SMTP Gateway
Secondary SMTP Gateway
Specify the SMTP server port information.
Image Format
PDF (.pdf)
XPS (.xps)
Specify the image type for scan‑to‑fax jobs.
TIFF (.tif)
Content Type
Text
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text is the factory default setting.
Text/Photo
Graphics
Photo
Content Source
Color Laser
Inkjet
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Fax Resolution
Standard
Specify the resolution level for scan to fax.
Fine 200 dpi
Super Fine 300 dpi
Ultra Fine 600 dpi
Darkness
Lighten or darken the output.
1–9
Note: 5 factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
188
Use
To
Orientation
Portrait
Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Landscape
Original Size
Letter
Specify the paper size of the document that is being scanned.
Note: Mixed Sizes is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
Legal
default setting.
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan to fax job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages,
or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
On
Off
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu item applies to all scan functions.
Enable Analog Receive
Enable analog fax receive.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
E‑mail Settings menu
Use
To
E‑mail Server Setup
Subject
Specify e‑mail server information.
Notes:
Message
Base file name
• The subject box has a limitation of 255 characters.
• The message box has a limitation of 512 characters.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
189
Use
To
E‑mail Server Setup
Send me a copy
Never appears
On by default
Off by default
Always On
Send a copy of the e-mail to the sender.
Note: “Never appears” is the factory default setting.
E‑mail Server Setup
Max E‑mail size
0–65535 KB
Specify the maximum e-mail size in kilobytes.
Note: E-mails above the specified size are not sent.
E‑mail Server Setup
Send a message when an e-mail is greater than the configured size limit.
Size error message
E‑mail Server Setup
Specify a domain name, such as a company domain name, and then limit e‑mail
destinations to that domain name only.
Limit destinations
Notes:
• E-mail can be sent only to the specified domain.
• The limit is one domain.
E‑mail Server Setup
Web Link Setup
Server
Define the e‑mail server path name; for example: /directory/path.
Note: The characters * : ? < > |are invalid entries for a path name.
Login
Password
Path
Base file name
Web Link
Format
Specify the format of the scanned file.
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
PDF Version
1.2–1.6
Set the version of the PDF file that will be scanned for e‑mailing.
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
A–1a
Content Type
Text/Photo
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Text
Graphics
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
190
Use
To
Content Source
Color Laser
Inkjet
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Black and White Laser
Color
On
Specify whether or not copies are printed in color.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Off
Resolution
75 dpi
Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch.
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Darkness
Lighten or darken the output.
1–9
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Landscape
Original Size
Letter
Specify the paper size of the document being scanned.
Notes:
Legal
Executive
Folio
• A4 is the international factory default setting.
• Letter is the US factory default setting.
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
191
Use
To
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Specify how the text and graphics are oriented on the page.
Notes:
Long edge
Short edge
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape ).
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape ).
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality of the image.
Notes:
• “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
• 5 reduces the file size and quality of the image.
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
• This menu applies to all scan functions.
Text Default
Set the quality of a text image in relation to file size and quality of the image.
5–90
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Photo Default
Set the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the
image.
5–90
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image.
5–90
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
E‑mail images sent as
Attachment
Specify how the images will be sent.
Note: Attachment is the factory default setting.
Web Link
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan‑to‑e-mail job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the
pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
On
Off
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu applies to all scan functions.
Transmission Log
Print log
Specify whether or not the transmission log prints.
Note: Print log is the factory default setting.
Do not print log
Print only for error
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Specify the paper source for printing e-mail logs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Manual Feeder
E‑mail Bit Depth
Enable the Text/Photo mode to produce smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images when
Color is set to Off.
8 bit
1 bit
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
192
Use
To
Custom Job scanning
Copy in a single copy job, a document that contains mixed paper sizes.
Off
On
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Only appears when a printer hard disk is installed.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Scan Preview
Specify whether or not a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Allow Save as Shortcut
Save e-mail addresses as shortcuts.
Notes:
On
Off
• On is the factory default setting.
• When set to Off, the Save as Shortcut button does not appear on the e-mail
Destination screen.
Background Removal
Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.
‑4 to 4
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue
Color Dropout
Specify which color to drop during scanning, and how much to increase or decrease
the dropout.
Color Dropout
None
Notes:
Red
Green
Blue
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Contrast
Best for content
0–5
Specify the contrast of the output.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
Create a negative image of the original document.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
193
Use
To
Shadow Detail
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
‑4 to 4
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge
Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.
1–5
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature
Enable the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer
output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the
default.
‑4 to 4
Use cc:/bcc:
Enable the use of the cc: and bcc: fields.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
FTP Settings menu
Use
To
Format
Specify the format of the file for FTP sending.
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF (.pdf)
TIFF (.tif)
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
PDF Version
1.2–1.6
Set the version level of the PDF file for FTP sending.
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
A–1a
Content Type
Text/Photo
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Text
Graphics
Content Source
Color Laser
Inkjet
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Black and White Laser
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
194
Use
To
Color
On
Specify whether or not copies are printed in color.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Off
Resolution
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
75 dpi
Specify the quality of the scan in dots per inch.
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Darkness
Lighten or darken the output.
1–9
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Landscape
Original Size
Letter
Specify the paper size of the original document.
Notes:
Legal
Executive
Folio
• Letter is the US factory default setting.
• A4 is the international factory default setting.
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Specify how the text and graphics are oriented on the page.
Notes:
Long edge
Short edge
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape ).
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape ).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
195
Use
To
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the
image.
Notes:
• “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
• 5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
• This menu applies to all scan functions.
Text Default
Set the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image.
5–90
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Photo Default
Set the quality of a text or a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the
image.
5–90
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image.
5–90
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan‑to‑FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages,
or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
On
Off
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu applies to all scan functions.
Transmission Log
Print log
Specify whether the transmission log prints.
Note: “Print log” is the factory default setting.
Do not print log
Print only for error
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Specify a paper source when printing FTP logs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Manual Feeder
Log Output Bin
Standard Bin
Bin [x]
Specify an output bin for FTP logs.
Notes:
• Standard Bin is the factory default setting.
• Bin [x] only appears only when at least one optional output bin is installed.
FTP bit Depth
8 bit
Enable the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images when
Color is set to Off.
1 bit
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
Base File Name
Specify a base file name.
Note: The limitation is 53 characters.
Custom Job Scanning
Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single scan job.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
196
Use
To
Scan Preview
Specify whether a preview will appear on the display for scan jobs.
Off
On
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Appears only when a printer hard disk is installed.
Allow Save as Shortcut
Enable shortcut creation for FTP addresses.
On
Off
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Background Removal
Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.
‑4 to 4
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue
Color Dropout
Specify which color to drop during scanning, and how much to increase or decrease
the dropout.
Color Dropout
None
Notes:
Red
Green
Blue
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Contrast
0–5
Specify the contrast of the output.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Best for content
Mirror Image
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
Create a negative image of the original document.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
‑4 to 4
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge
Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
Adjust the amount of sharpness of a scanned image.
1–5
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
197
Use
To
Temperature
Enable the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer
output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the
default.
‑4 to 4
Flash Drive menu
Scan Settings
Use
To
Format
Specify the format of the file to be sent through FTP.
PDF (.pdf)
Secure PDF
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
PDF Version
1.2–1.6
A‑1a
Set the version of the PDF file to be sent through FTP.
Note: 1.5 is the factory default setting.
Content Type
Text/Photo
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Text
Graphics
Content Source
Color Laser
Inkjet
Specify how the original document is produced.
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Black and White Laser
Color
On
Specify whether prints are in black‑and‑white or color.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Off
Resolution
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
75 dpi
Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch (dpi).
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
198
Use
To
Darkness
Lighten or darken the output.
1–9
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Landscape
Original Size
Letter
Specify the paper size of the original document.
Note: Letter is the US factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default
Legal
setting.
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Specify how the text and graphics are oriented on a page.
Notes:
Long edge
Short edge
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Long edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for
portrait and top edge for landscape).
• Short edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality.
Notes:
• “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
• 5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
• 90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
• This menu applies to all scan functions.
Text Default
Set the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image.
5–90
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Photo Default
Set the quality of a text or a photo image in relation to file size and quality.
5–90
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
199
Use
To
Photo Default
Sets the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and quality.
5–90
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan to FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages,
or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page.
On
Off
Notes:
• On is the factory default setting.
• This menu applies to all scan functions.
Scan Bit Depth
8 bit
Enable the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images when
Color is set to Off.
1 bit
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
File Name
Specify a base file name.
Note: A maximum of 53 characters is allowed.
Custom Job Scanning
Copy a document containing mixed paper sizes in a single copy job.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Scan Preview
Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Background Removal
Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.
‑4 to 4
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Enable an equal balance of colors in the scanned image.
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue
Color Dropout
Specify which color to drop during scanning, and how much to increase or decrease
in the dropout.
Color Dropout
None
Notes:
Red
Green
Blue
• None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
• 128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Contrast
Best for content
0–5
Specify the contrast of the scanned image.
Note: “Best for content” is the factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
200
Use
To
Mirror Image
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
Create a negative image of the original document.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
‑4 to 4
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge
Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.
1–5
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature
Enable the user to specify “warm” or “cool” outputs. "Cool” values generate a bluer
output than the default while “warm” values generate a redder output than the
default.
‑4 to 4
Print Settings
Copies
1–999
Specify a default number of copies for each print job.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Paper Source
Tray [x]
Set a default paper source for all print jobs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
MP Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Color
Specify whether copies are printed in color or black‑and‑white.
Note: Color is the factory default setting.
Color
Black Only
Collate
Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.
On (1,2,1,2,1,2)
Off (1,1,1,2,2,2)
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
Specify whether prints are on one side or on both sides of the page.
Note: 1 sided is the factory default setting.
2 sided
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Define the way duplexed pagesare bound and how the printing on the back of the page isoriented
in relation to the printing on the front of the page.
Short Edge
Notes:
• Long Edge assumes binding along the long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top
edge for landscape).
• Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and
left edge for landscape).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
201
Paper Saver Orientation Specify the orientation of a multiple‑page document.
Auto
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and landscape.
Landscape
Portrait
Paper Saver
Off
Specify that multiple‑page images be printed on one side of a paper.
Notes:
2‑Up
• Off is the factory default setting.
3‑Up
• The number selected is the number of page images that will print per side.
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up
Paper Saver Border
Print a border on each page image.
None
Solid
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Specify the positioning of multiple‑page images.
Notes:
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
• Horizontal is the factory default setting.
• Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or
landscape orientation.
Separator Sheets
Off
Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted.
Notes:
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if Collate is set to
On. If Collate is set to Off, then a blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages,
such as after all page 1's and after all page 2's.
• Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
• Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of the print job. This setting is
useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in a document .
Separator Sheet Source Specify the paper source for separator sheets.
Tray [x]
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Manual Feeder
Blank Pages
Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job.
Do Not Print
Print
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
202
Print Settings
Setup menu
Use
To
Printer Language
PS Emulation
Set the default printer language.
Notes:
PCL Emulation
• PS Emulation is the factory default printer language. PS
emulation uses a PS interpreter for processing print jobs.
• PCL Emulation uses a PCL interpreter for processing print
jobs.
• Setting a printer language as the default does not prevent a
software program from sending print jobs that use another
printer language.
Job Waiting
Specify if print jobs are removed from the print queue when they
require unavailable printer options or custom settings. These print
jobs are stored in a separate print queue, so other jobs print
normally. When the missing information or options are obtained,
the stored jobs print.
On
Off
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a non-read‑only printer
hard disk is installed. This requirement ensures that stored
jobs are not deleted if the printer loses power.
Print Area
Normal
Set the logical and physical printable area.
Notes:
Whole Page
• Normal is the factory default setting. When attempting to
print data in the non‑printable area defined by the Normal
setting, the printer clips the image at the boundary.
• Whole Page allows images to be moved into the
non‑printable area defined by the Normal setting, but the
printer clips the image at the Normal setting boundary. This
setting affects only pages printed using a PCL 5e interpreter.
This setting has no effect on pages printed using the PCL XL
or PostScript interpreter.
Printer Usage
Max Yield
Set the printer for a faster print speed or a higher toner yield.
Note: Max Yield is the factory default setting.
Max Speed
Black Only Mode
Set the printer to print text and graphics using only the black toner
cartridge.
On
Off
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
203
Use
To
Download Target
Set the storage location for downloads.
RAM
Flash
Disk
Notes:
• RAM is the factory default setting. Downloads stored in RAM
are temporary.
• Storing downloads in flash memory or on a printer hard disk
places them in permanent storage. Downloads remain in
flash memory or on the printer hard disk even when the
printer is turned off.
• This menu item appears only when a flash or printer hard
disk is installed.
• The menu setting reverts to its factory default value after
each power‑on reset (POR).
Resource Save
Specify how the printer handles temporary downloads, such as
fonts and macros stored in the RAM, when the printer receives a
print job that requires more memory than is available.
On
Off
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting. Off sets the printer to retain
downloads only until memory is needed. Downloads are
deleted in order to process print jobs.
• On sets the printer to retain downloads during language
changes and printer resets. If the printer runs out of
memory, 38 Memory Fullappears, but downloads are
not deleted.
Print All Order
Alphabetical
Oldest First
Specify the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed
when Print All Order is selected.
Notes:
Newest First
• Alphabetical is the factory default setting.
• Print jobs always appear in alphabetical order on the printer
control panel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
204
Finishing menu
Use
To
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
Specify whether two‑sided (duplex) printing is set as the default for all print jobs.
Notes:
2 sided
• 1 sided is the factory default setting.
• When two-sided printing is selected and the media is not the same on both
sides, the media must be loaded in the trays in a different orientation.
• When two-sided printing is selected and the media is not the same on both
sides, the media must be loaded in the trays in a different orientation.
• You can set two‑sided printing in the software program. For Windows users,
click File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup. For
Macintosh users, choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the
print dialog and pop‑up menus.
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Define binding for duplexed pages in relation to paper orientation.
Notes:
Short Edge
• Long Edge is the factory default setting. Long Edge assumes binding along the
long edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).
• Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
Copies
Specify the default number of copies for each print job.
1–999
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print
Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Collate
Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.
Off (1,1,1,2,2,2)
On (1,2,1,2,1,2)
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• On stacks the print job in sequence.
Separator Sheets
Off
Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted.
Notes:
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if
Collate is set to On. If Collate is set to Off, then a blank page is inserted
between each set of printed pages, such as after all page 1's and after all page
2's.
• Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
• Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of a print job. This
setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in
a document.
Separator Source
Tray [x]
Specify the paper source for separator sheets.
Note: Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
Manual Feeder
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
205
Use
To
Paper Saver
Off
Specify that multiple‑page images be printed on one side of a paper.
Notes:
2‑Up
• Off is the factory default setting.
3‑Up
• The number selected is the number of page images that prints per side.
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up
Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Specify the positioning of multiple‑page images.
Notes:
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
• Horizontal is the factory default setting.
• Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in
portrait or landscape orientation.
Paper Saver Orientation
Auto
Specify the orientation of a multiple‑page document.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and
Landscape
landscape.
Portrait
Paper Saver Border
Print a border on each page image.
None
Solid
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Quality menu
Quality menu items and descriptions
Use
To
Print Mode
Color
Specify whether images are printed in black and white or in color.
Notes:
Black Only
• Color is the factory default setting.
• The printer driver is capable of overriding this setting.
Color Correction
Auto
Adjust the color output on the printed page.
Notes:
Off
Manual
• Auto is the factory default setting. Auto applies different color conversion tables
to each object on the printed page.
• Off turns off color correction.
• Manual allows customization of the color tables using the settings available from
the Manual Color menu.
• Due to the differences in additive and subtractive colors, certain colors that
appear on computer monitors are impossible to duplicate on the printed page.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
206
Use
To
Print Resolution
1200 dpi
Specify the printed output resolution.
Note: 4800 CQ is the factory default setting.
4800 CQ
Toner Darkness
Lighten or darken the printed output.
1–5
Notes:
• 4 is the factory default setting.
• Selecting a smaller number can help conserve toner.
• If Print Mode is set to Black Only, then a setting of 5 increases toner density and
darkness to all print jobs.
• If Print Mode is set to Color, then a setting of 5 is the same as a setting of 4.
Enhance Fine Lines
Enable a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings, maps, electrical
circuit diagrams, and flow charts.
On
Off
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• To set Enhance Fine Lines from the software program, with a document open,
click File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.,
• To set Enhance Fine Lines using the Embedded Web Server, open a Web browser,
and then type the IP address of the printer in the address field.
Color Saver
Reduce the amount of toner used for graphics and images. The amount of toner used
for text is not reduced.
On
Off
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• On overrides Toner Darkness settings.
RGB Brightness
Adjust brightness in color outputs.
‑6 to 6
Notes:
• 0 is the factory default setting.
• This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are being used.
RGB Contrast
Adjust contrast in color outputs.
0–5
Notes:
• 0 is the factory default setting.
• This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are being used.
RGB Saturation
Adjust saturation in color outputs.
0–5
Notes:
• 0 is the factory default setting.
• This does not affect files where CMYK color specifications are being used.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
207
Use
To
Color Balance
Cyan
Adjust color in printed output by increasing or decreasing the amount of toner being
used for each color.
‑5 to 5
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Magenta
‑5 to 5
Yellow
‑5 to 5
Black
‑5 to 5
Reset Defaults
Color Samples
sRGB Display
sRGB Vivid
Display—True Black
Vivid
Print sample pages for each of the RGB and CMYK color conversion tables used in the
printer.
Notes:
• Selecting any setting prints the sample.
• Color samples consist of a series of colored boxes along with the RGB or CMYK
combination that creates the color observed. These pages can be used to help
decide which combinations to use to get the desired printed output.
Off—RGB
US CMYK
Euro CMYK
Vivid CMYK
Off—CMYK
• To access a complete list of color sample pages from the Embedded Web Server,
open a Web browser, and then type the IP address of the printer in the address
field.
Manual Color
RGB Image
Vivid
Customize the RGB color conversions.
Notes:
• sRGB Display is the factory default setting for RGB Image. This applies a color
conversion table to an output that matches the colors displayed on a computer
monitor.
sRGB Display
Display True Black
sRGB Vivid
Off
• sRGB Vivid is the factory default setting for RGB Text and RGB Graphics. sRGB
Vivid applies a color table that increases saturation. This is preferred for business
graphics and text.
RGB Text
Vivid
• Vivid applies a color conversion table that produces brighter, more saturated
colors.
sRGB Display
Display True Black
sRGB Vivid
Off
• Display True Black applies a color conversion table that uses only black toner for
neutral gray colors.
• Off turns off color conversion.
RGB Graphics
Vivid
sRGB Display
Display True Black
sRGB Vivid
Off
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
208
Use
To
Manual Color
CMYK Image
US CMYK
Euro CMYK
Vivid CMYK
Off
Customize the CMYK color conversions.
Notes:
• US CMYK is the US factory default setting. US CMYK applies a color conversion
table that tries to produce output that matches SWOP color output.
• Euro CMYK is the international factory default setting. Euro CMYK applies a color
conversion table that tries to produce output that matches EuroScale color
output.
CMYK Text
US CMYK
Euro CMYK
Vivid CMYK
Off
• Vivid CMYK increases color saturation for the US CMYK color conversion table.
• Off turns off color conversion.
CMYK Graphics
US CMYK
Euro CMYK
Vivid CMYK
Off
Spot Color Replacement
Color Adjust
Provide the capability to assign specific CMYK values to named spot colors.
Initiate a recalibration of color conversion tables and allow the printer to make
adjustments for color variations in output.
Notes:
• Calibrating starts when the menu is selected. Calibratingappears on the
display until the process is finished.
• Color variations in output sometimes result from changeable conditions such as
room temperature and humidity. Color adjustments are made on printer
algorithms. Color alignment is also recalibrated in this process.
Job Accounting menu
Note: This menu item appears only when a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed. Make sure the
printer hard disk is not read/write‑ or write‑protected.
Use
To
Job Accounting Log
Determine and set if the printer creates a log of the print jobs it receives.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Job Accounting Utilities
Print and delete log files or export them to a flash drive.
Accounting Log Frequency
Weekly
Determine and set how often a log file is created.
Note: Monthly is the factory default setting.
Monthly
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
209
Use
To
Log Action at End of Frequency
None
Determine and set how the printer responds when the frequency threshold expires.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Disk Near Full Level
Specify the maximum size of the log file before the printer executes the Disk Near
Full Action.
Off
1–99
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Disk Near Full Action
None
Determine and set how the printer responds when the printer hard disk is nearly full.
Notes:
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post Current Log
• None is the factory default setting.
• The value defined in Disk Near Full Level determines when this action is
triggered.
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current
Disk Full Action
Determine and set how the printer responds when disk usage reaches the maximum
limit (100MB).
None
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current
URL to Post Logs
Determine and set where the printer posts job accounting logs.
Specify the e‑mail address to which the device sends job accounting logs.
Specify the prefix you want for the log file name.
E‑mail Address to Send Logs
Log File Prefix
Note: The current host name defined in the TCP/IP menu is used as the default log
file prefix.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
210
Utilities menu
Use
To
Remove Held Jobs
Confidential
Held
Delete confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk.
Notes:
• Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are resident in the printer.
Bookmarks, print jobs on flash drives, and other types of held jobs are not
affected.
Not Restored
All
• Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that are not restored from the
printer hard disk or memory.
Format Flash
Format the flash memory.
Yes
No
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory is
being formatted.
Notes:
• Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory.
• No cancels the format request.
• Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory card in
the printer.
• The flash memory option card must not be read/write‑ or write‑protected.
• This menu item appears only when a non‑defective flash memory card is
installed.
Delete Downloads on Disk
Delete Now
Delete downloads from the printer hard disk, including all held jobs, buffered jobs,
and parked jobs.
Do Not Delete
Notes:
• Delete Now sets the printer to delete the downloads and allows the display to
return to the originating screen after the deletion.
• Do Not Delete sets the printer display to return to the main Utilities menu for
touch‑screen printer models. When selected in non‑touch‑screen printer
models, Do Not Delete sets the printer to return to the originating screen after
the deletion.
Activate Hex Trace
Assist in isolating the source of a print job problem.
Notes:
• When activated, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and
character representation, and control codes are not executed.
• To exit or deactivate Hex Trace, turn off or reset the printer.
Coverage Estimator
Provide an estimate of the percentage coverage of toner on a page. The estimate is
printed on a separate page at the end of each print job.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
211
XPS menu
Use
To
Print Error Pages
Print a page containing information on errors, including XML markup errors.
Off
On
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
PDF menu
Use
To
Scale to Fit
Yes
Scale page content to fit the selected paper size.
Note: No is the factory default setting.
No
Annotations
Do Not Print
Print
Print annotations in a PDF.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
PostScript menu
Use
To
Print PS Error
Print a page containing the PostScript error.
On
Off
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Lock PS Startup Mode
Enable users to disable the SysStart file.
On
Off
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Font Priority
Resident
Establish the font search order.
Notes:
Flash/Disk
• Resident is the factory default setting.
• This menu item appears only when a formatted, non‑defective flash
memory option card or printer hard disk is installed.
• Make sure the flash memory option or printer hard disk is not
read/write‑, write‑, or password‑protected.
• Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100%.
Image Smoothing
Enhance the contrast and sharpness of low‑resolution images and smoothen
their color transitions.
On
Off
Notes:
• Off is the factory default setting.
• Image Smoothing has no effect on images that are 300 dpi or higher in
resolution.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
212
PCL Emul menu
Use
To
Font Source
Resident
Disk
Specify the set of fonts used in the Font Name menu.
Notes:
• Resident is the factory default setting. It shows the factory default set of
Download
Flash
All
fonts downloaded in the RAM.
• Flash and Disk settings show all fonts resident in that option. Make sure
the flash option is properly formatted and is not read/write‑, or
password‑protected.
• Download shows all the fonts downloaded in the RAM.
• All shows all fonts available to any option.
Font Name
Identify a specific font and where it is stored.
Courier 10
Note: Courier 10 is the factory default setting.
Symbol Set
10U PC‑8
Specify the symbol set for each font name.
Notes:
12U PC‑850
• 10U PC‑8 is the US factory default setting. 12U PC‑850 is the international
factory default setting.
• A symbol set is a set of alphabetical and numeric characters, punctuation,
and special symbols. Symbol sets support the different languages or
specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text. Only the
supported symbol sets are shown.
PCL Emulation Settings
Point Size
Change the point size for scalable typographic fonts.
Notes:
1.00–1008.00
• 12 is the factory default setting.
• Point size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point
equals approximately 0.014 of an inch. This can be increased or decreased
in 0.25‑point increments.
PCL Emulation Settings
Pitch
Specify the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts.
Notes:
0.08–100.00
• 10 is the factory default setting.
• Pitch refers to the number of fixed‑space characters per inch (cpi). This
can be increased or decreased in 0.01‑cpi increments.
• For non‑scalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the display but
cannot be changed.
PCL Emulation Settings
Orientation
Specify the orientation of text and graphics on a page.
Notes:
Portrait
Landscape
• Portrait is the factory default setting. It prints text and graphics parallel to
the short edge of the page.
• Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
213
Use
To
PCL Emulation Settings
Lines per Page
1–255
Specify the number of lines that print on each page.
Notes:
• 60 is the US factory default setting. 64 is the international default setting.
• The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the
Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the paper size
and orientation before setting Lines per Page.
PCL Emulation Settings
A4 Width
Set the printer to print on A4‑size paper.
Notes:
198 mm
203 mm
• 198 mm is the factory default setting.
• The 203‑mm setting sets the width of the page to allow the printing of
eighty 10‑pitch characters.
PCL Emulation Settings
Specify whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR) after
a line feed (LF) control command.
Auto CR after LF
On
Off
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
PCL Emulation Settings
Specify whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after a
carriage return (CR) control command.
Auto LF after CR
On
Off
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Tray Renumber
Configure the printer to work with printer software or programs that use
different source assignments for trays, drawers, and feeders.
Assign MP Feeder
Off
Notes:
None
0–199
Assign Tray [x]
• Off is the factory default setting.
• None ignores the Select Paper Feed command. This selection appears
only when it is selected by the PCL 5e interpreter.
Off
None
• 0–199 allows a custom setting to be assigned.
0–199
Assign Manual Paper
Off
None
0–199
Assign Manual Envelope
Off
None
0–199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
214
Use
To
Tray Renumber
View Factory Defaults
MPF Default = 8
T1 Default = 1
Display the factory default setting assigned to each tray, drawer, or feeder.
T2 Default = 4
T3 Default = 5
T4 Default = 20
T5 Default = 21
Env Default = 6
MPaper Default = 2
MEnv Default = 3
Tray Renumber
Return all tray, drawer, and feeder assignments to the factory default settings.
Restore Defaults
Yes
No
HTML menu
Use
To
Font Name
Albertus MT
Joanna MT
Letter Gothic
Set the default font for HTML documents.
Note: The Times font is used in HTML documents that do not
Antique Olive
Apple Chancery
Arial MT
Avant Garde
Bodoni
Lubalin Graph
Marigold
MonaLisa Recut
Monaco
New CenturySbk
New York
Optima
specify a font.
Bookman
Chicago
Clarendon
Cooper Black
Copperplate
Coronet
Oxford
Palatino
StempelGaramond
Taffy
Courier
Times
Eurostile
Garamond
Geneva
Gill Sans
Goudy
TimesNewRoman
Univers
Zapf Chancery
NewSansMTCS
NewSansMTCT
New SansMTJA
NewSansMTKO
Helvetica
Hoefler Text
Intl CG Times
Intl Courier
Intl Univers
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
215
Use
To
Font Size
Set the default font size for HTML documents.
1–255 pt
Notes:
• 12 pt is the factory default setting.
• Font size can be increased in 1‑point increments.
Scale
Scale the default font for HTML documents.
1–400%
Notes:
• 100% is the factory default setting.
• Scaling can be increased in 1% increments.
Orientation
Portrait
Set the page orientation for HTML documents.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Landscape
Margin Size
Set the page margin for HTML documents.
8–255 mm
Notes:
• 19 mm is the factory default setting.
• Margin size can be increased in 1‑mm increments.
Backgrounds
Do Not Print
Print
Specify whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents.
Note: Print is the factory default setting.
Image menu
Use
To
Select the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientation.
Auto Fit
On
Note: On is the factory default setting. It overrides scaling and orientation settings
Off
for some images.
Invert
On
Invert bitonal monochrome images.
Notes:
Off
• Off is the factory default setting.
• This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images.
Scaling
Scale the image to fit the selected paper size.
Anchor Top Left
Best Fit
Anchor Center
Fit Height/Width
Fit Height
Notes:
• Best Fit is the factory default setting.
• When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.
Fit Width
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding the printer menus
216
Use
To
Orientation
Set the image orientation.
Portrait
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Landscape
Reverse Portrait
Reverse Landscape
Help menu
The Help menu consists of a series of Help pages that are stored in the multifunction printer (MFP) as PDF files. They
contain information about using the printer and performing various tasks, including copying, scanning, and faxing.
English, French, German, and Spanish translations are stored in the printer.
Menu item
Print All Guides
Copy Guide
Fax Guide
Description
Prints all the guides
Provides information about making copies and changing settings
Provides information about sending faxes using fax numbers, shortcut numbers,
or the address book, and about changing settings
E‑mail Guide
Provides information about sending e‑mails using addresses, shortcut numbers, or
the address book, and about changing settings
FTP Guide
Provides information about scanning documents directly to an FTP server using an
FTP address, shortcut numbers, or the address book, and about changing settings
Print Defects Guide
Information Guide
Supplies Guide
Provides help in resolving repeating defects in copies or prints
Provides help in locating additional information
Provides part numbers for ordering supplies
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving money and the environment
217
Saving money and the environment
Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their impact
on the environment. We design with the environment in mind, engineer our packaging to reduce materials, and provide
collection and recycling programs. For more information, see:
• The Notices chapter
By selecting certain printer settings or tasks, you may be able to reduce your printer's impact even further. This chapter
outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit.
Saving paper and toner
Studies show that as much as 80% of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage. You can significantly
reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions, such as printing on both
sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper.
For information on how you can quickly save paper and energy using one printer setting, see “Using Eco‑Mode” on
Using recycled paper
As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for
use in laser printers. For more information on recycled papers that work well with your printer, see “Using recycled
Conserving supplies
There are a number of ways you can reduce the amount of paper and toner you use when printing. You can:
Use both sides of the paper
If your printer model supports duplex printing, you can control whether print appears on one or two sides of the paper
by selecting 2‑sided printing from the Print dialog or the Lexmark Toolbar.
Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper
You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper by
selecting a setting from the Multipage printing (N‑Up) section of the Print dialog.
Check your first draft for accuracy
Before printing or making multiple copies of a document:
• Use the previewfeature, which you can selectfromthe Printdialog or the Lexmark Toolbar, tosee how thedocument
will look before you print it.
• Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving money and the environment
218
Avoid paper jams
Carefully select and load paper to avoid paper jams. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 253.
Saving energy
Using Eco‑Mode
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Eco‑Mode > select a setting
Use
To
Off
Use the factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco‑Mode. Off supports the performance
specifications of the printer.
Energy
Reduce energy use, especially when the printer is idle.
• Printer engine motors do not start until it is ready to print. You may notice a short delay before the
first page is printed.
• The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity.
Energy/Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy and Paper modes.
Plain Paper
• Enable the automatic two‑sided (duplex) feature.
• Turn off print log features.
3 Click Submit.
Reducing printer noise
To select a Quiet Mode setting using the Embedded Web Server:
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Quiet Mode > select a setting
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving money and the environment
219
Use
To
On
Reduce printer noise.
• Print jobs will process at a reduced speed.
• Printer engine motors do not start until a document is
ready to print. There will be a short delay before the
first page is printed.
• If your printer has faxing capability, then fax sounds are
reduced or disabled, including those made by the fax
speaker and ringer. The fax is placed in standby mode.
• The alarm control and cartridge alarm sounds are
turned off.
• The printer will ignore the Advance Start command.
Off
Use factory default settings. This setting supports the
performance specifications of the printer.
Note: Selecting Photo from the printer driver may disable
Quiet Mode and provide better print quality and full
speed printing.
3 Click Submit.
Adjusting Sleep mode
To save energy, decrease the number of minutes the printer waits before it enters Sleep mode.
Available settings range from 1–180 minutes. The factory default setting is 30 minutes.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Timeouts.
3 In the Sleep Mode field, enter the number of minutes you want for the printer to wait before it enters Sleep Mode.
4 Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Sleep Mode
2 In the Sleep Mode field, select the number of minutes you want for the printer to wait before it enters Sleep Mode.
3 Touch
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving money and the environment
220
Using Hibernate Mode
Hibernate is an ultra‑low power operating mode. When operating in Hibernate mode, the printer is essentially off, and
all other systems and devices are powered down safely.
Note: The Hibernate and Sleep modes can be scheduled.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings > Sleep Button Settings.
3 From the Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button drop‑down menu, select Hibernate.
4 Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings
2 Touch Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button.
3 Touch Hibernate >
.
Adjusting the brightness of the display
To save energy, or if you are have trouble reading your display, adjust the brightness of the display.
Available settings range from 20–100. The factory default setting is 100.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated
by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > General Settings.
3 In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.
4 Click Submit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving money and the environment
221
Using the printer control panel
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Screen Brightness
2 In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.
3 Touch
.
Restoring factory default settings
If you want to keep a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before restoring
the factory default settings. For more information, see “Printing a menu settings page” on page 58.
If you want a more comprehensive method of restoring the printer factory default settings, then perform the Wipe All
Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default
settings. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and network/port menu settings. All
downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in the flash memory or in a printer hard disk are not
affected.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Factory Defaults > Restore Now >
Recycling
Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling. For more information,
see:
• The Notices chapter
Recycling Lexmark products
To return Lexmark products for recycling:
2 Find the product type you want to recycle, and then select your country or region from the list.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Note: Printer supplies and hardware not listed in a Lexmark collection program may be recycled through your local
recycling center. Contact your local recycling center to determine the items they accept.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving money and the environment
222
Recycling Lexmark packaging
Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging. Lesspackaging helps toensure that Lexmark printers are transported
in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to dispose of. These
efficiencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions, energy savings, and natural resource savings.
Lexmark cartons are 100% recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your area.
The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your
area.
When you return a cartridge to Lexmark, you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in. Lexmark will recycle the
box.
Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling
The Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making it
both easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling. One hundred
percent of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling. Boxes used
to return the cartridges are also recycled.
To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling, follow the instructions that came with your printer or cartridge and
use the prepaid shipping label. You can also do the following:
2 From the Toner Cartridges section, select your country or region from the list.
3 Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing the printer
223
Securing the printer
Locking the system board
To limit access to the system board, attach a security lock to the printer in the location identified in the illustration. The
printer is compatible with most laptop computer security locks.
Statement of Volatility
Your printer contains various types of memory that can store device and network settings, and user data.
Types of memory
Description
Volatile memory
Your printer uses standard Random Access Memory (RAM) to
temporarily buffer user data during simple print and copy
jobs.
Non-volatile memory
Your printer may use two forms of non-volatile memory:
EEPROM and NAND (flash memory). Both types are used to
store the operating system, device settings, network
information, scanner and bookmark settings, and embedded
solutions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing the printer
224
Types of memory
Description
Hard disk memory
Some printers have a hard disk drive installed. The printer
hard diskisdesigned for device-specificfunctionality. Thislets
thedevice retainbuffered userdatafromcomplexscan, print,
copy, and fax jobs, as well as form data, and font data.
Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances:
• The printer is being decommissioned.
• The printer hard disk is being replaced.
• The printer is being moved to a different department or location.
• The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization.
• The printer is being removed from your premises for service.
• The printer is being sold to another organization.
Disposing of a printer hard disk
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
In high‑security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored
in the printer hard disk cannot be accessed when the printer—or its hard disk—is removed from your premises.
• Degaussing—Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic field that erases stored data
• Crushing—Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable
• Milling—Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits
Note: Most data can be erased electronically, but the only way to guarantee that all data is completely erased is to
physically destroy each hard disk where data is stored.
Erasing volatile memory
The volatile memory (RAM) installed in yourprinter requires a power source toretain information. To erase the buffered
data, simply turn off the printer.
Erasing non‑volatile memory
• Individual settings, device and network settings, security settings, and embedded solutions—Erase information
and settings by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu.
• Fax data—Erase fax settings and data by selecting Wipe All Settings in the Configuration menu.
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar
appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
powered up, the touch screen displays a list of functions, instead of the standard home screen icons.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing the printer
225
3 Touch Wipe All Settings.
The printer will restart several times during this process.
Note: Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings, solutions, jobs, faxes, and passwords from the printer
memory.
4 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Erasing printer hard disk memory
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
Configuring Disk Wiping in the printer menus lets you remove residual confidential material left by scan, print, copy,
and fax jobs, by securely overwriting files that have been marked for deletion.
Using the printer control panel
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar
appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
powered up, the touch screen displays a list of functions, instead of the standard home screen icons.
3 Touch Wipe Disk, and then touch one of the following:
• Wipe disk (fast)—This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass.
• Wipe disk (secure)—This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times, followed by a
verification pass. A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220.22‑M standard for securely erasing data
from a hard disk. Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method.
4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
• A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task.
• Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be unavailable
for other user tasks.
5 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Configuring printer hard disk encryption
Enable the hard disk encryption to prevent loss of sensitive data in the event the printer or its hard disk is stolen.
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing the printer
226
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Settings > Security > Disk Encryption.
Note: Disk Encryption appears in the Security Menu only when a formatted, non‑defective printer hard disk is
installed.
3 From the Disk encryption menu, select Enable.
Notes:
• Enabling disk encryption will erase the content of the printer hard disk.
• Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
4 Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar
appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. Once the printer is fully
powered up, the touch screen displays a list of functions, instead of standard home screen icons such as Copy or
Fax.
3 Touch Disk Encryption > Enable.
Note: Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.
4 Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
• Do not turn off the printer during the encryption process. Doing so may result in loss of data.
• Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
• A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task. After the disk has been encrypted, the printer
will return to the Enable/Disable screen.
5 Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing the printer
227
Finding printer security information
In high-security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored
in the printer cannot be accessed. For more information, visit the Lexmark security Web page and see the Embedded
Web Server Administrator’s Guide.
Tech Library > Manuals & Guides
2 Type Embedded Web Serverin the keyword field, and then click Filter.
3 Click Embedded Web Server to launch the document.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
228
Maintaining the printer
Periodically, certain tasks are required to maintain the optimum performance of your printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Failure to replace parts and supplies when directed, may cause damage to your
printer or prevent the printer from performing optimally.
Cleaning the printer parts
Cleaning the interior of the printer
Note: You may need to perform this task after every few months.
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper handling is not covered by the printer
warranty.
1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the wall outlet.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the interior of the printer,
unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables to the printer before proceeding.
2 Remove paper from the standard bin and multipurpose feeder.
3 Remove any dust, lint, and pieces of paper around and from inside the printer using a soft brush or vacuum.
4 Use a dry cloth to wipe away loose toner particles.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the photoconductor unit or imaging unit, do not the leave the
door open for more than 10 minutes.
Cleaning the exterior of the printer
1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the wall outlet.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer,
unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables to the printer before proceeding.
2 Remove all paper from the printer.
3 Dampen a clean, lint‑free cloth with water.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents, as they may damage the finish of
the printer.
4 Wipe only the outside of the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Using a damp cloth to clean the interior may cause damage to your printer.
5 Make sure all areas of the printer are dry before beginning a new print job.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
229
Cleaning the scanner glass
Make sure you clean the ADF glass. A small speck of dirt on the ADF glass can cause a streak that goes down the entire
length of the scanned page.
1 Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2 Open the scanner cover.
1
2
4
3
1
2
3
4
White underside of the ADF cover
White underside of the scanner cover
Scanner glass
ADF glass
3 Wipe the areas shown and let them dry.
4 Close the scanner cover.
Cleaning the ADF parts
Clean the ADF parts periodically to maintain optimal printing performance. Residue on the ADF parts may cause print
quality issues and false 290–294 paper jam messages.
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth with water.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
230
3 Open the ADF cover.
4 Remove the pick roller assembly.
5 Wipe the surface of both pick rollers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
231
6 Replace the pick roller assembly.
7 Wipe the entire surface under the ADF cover, including the two small white rollers.
8 Wipe the separator pad, and then wipe the pick pad.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
232
9 Pull the flap up as shown, and then wipe the sensor behind it.
10 Close the flap, and then close the ADF cover.
Cleaning the printhead lenses
Clean the printhead lenses when you encounter print quality problems.
1 Open the top access cover, and then open the front door.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
233
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the photoconductors, do not leave the front door open for
more than 10 minutes.
2 Remove all four toner cartridges.
Note: Do not remove the photoconductors for this procedure.
3 Locate the four printhead lenses.
4 Clean the lenses using compressed air.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the printhead lenses. Doing so may cause damage.
5 Reinstall the toner cartridges.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
234
6 Close the front door, and then close the top access cover.
2
1
Checking the status of parts and supplies
A message appears on the display when a replacement supply item is needed or when maintenance is required. For
more information, see “Supplies menu” on page 134.
Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel
From the home screen, touch Status/Supplies > View Supplies.
Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server
Note: Make sure the computer and the printer are connected to the same network.
1 Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
• View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated
by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
• If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2 Click Device Status > More Details.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
235
Ordering parts and supplies
To order parts and supplies in the U.S., contact Lexmark at 1-800-539-6275 for information about Lexmark authorized
supplies dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com or contact
the place where you purchased the printer.
Notes:
• Each gauge displays the estimated life left for the supply or part. For more information, see “Supplies menu” on
• All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter‑ or A4‑size plain paper.
• The printer is designed to send a "low" message to signal when a replacement supply item needs to be
purchased and then a "replace" message when the new supply item, except the waste toner bottle, should be
installed.
• The printer displays a "near full" message when a new waste toner bottle needs to be purchased.
• The ADF replacement parts only post a "replace" message when they reach their expected life.
Ordering a toner cartridge
When a message appears on the printer display indicating which toner cartridge needs to be replaced, immediately
order a new toner cartridge.
For information on replacing a toner cartridge, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
Estimated cartridge yield is based on the ISO / IEC 19798 standard (with about 5% coverage per color). Extremely low
print coverage (less than 1.25% for a color) for extended periods of time may negatively affect actual yield for that color
and may cause cartridge parts to fail prior to exhaustion of toner.
Recommended toner cartridges and part numbers
Part name
Lexmark Return Program Cartridge
Regular cartridge
Black High Yield Toner Cartridge
X746H1KG
X746H2KG
Yellow Toner Cartridge
Yellow High Yield Toner Cartridge*
X746A1YG
X748H1YG
X746A2YG
X748H2YG
Magenta Toner Cartridge
Magenta High Yield Toner Cartridge*
X746A1MG
X748H1MG
X746A2MG
X748H2MG
Cyan Toner Cartridge
Cyan High Yield Toner Cartridge*
X746A1CG
X748H1CG
X746A2CG
X748H2CG
* These toner cartridges are supported only in X748x printer models.
Ordering a fuser or a transfer module
A message on the printer display appears when the fuser or transfer module needs to be replaced.
For information on replacing the fuser or transfer module, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
236
Recommended part numbers
Part name
Part number
Fuser
40X8112 (100 V)
40X8110 (115 V)
40X8111 (230 V)
Transfer module
40X8307
Ordering a waste toner bottle
A message on the printer display appears when the waste toner bottle needs to be replaced.
For information on replacing the waste toner bottle, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
Note: Waste toner bottle reuse is not recommended.
Recommended part number
Part name
Part number
Waste toner bottle
C734X77G
Ordering ADF replacement parts
Order ADF replacement parts if you experience problems with paper double-feeding or failing to feed through the ADF.
For information on replacing the ADF parts, see the instruction sheets that came with the parts.
Recommended part numbers
Part name
Part number
40X5188
ADF pick assembly
Separator pad
ADF pick pad
40X5187
40X5189
Ordering a photoconductor
A message will appear on the printer display when a photoconductor needs to be replaced.
For information on replacing a photoconductor, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
Recommended part numbers
Part name
Part number
C734X20G
C734X24G
Photoconductor
Photoconductor, Multi‑Pack
Notes:
• All four photoconductors should be replaced at the same time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
237
• Reset the maintenance counter back to zero after installing the four new photoconductors.
Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies
Lexmark printers, parts, and supplies are designed to perform together for superior print quality. We recommend that
you use only genuine Lexmark parts and supplies to help extend the life of your product.
Lexmark's warranty does not cover damage caused by non-Lexmark parts and supplies.
Storing supplies
Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you
are ready to use them.
Do not expose supplies to:
• Direct sunlight
• Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)
• High humidity above 80%
• Salty air
• Corrosive gases
• Heavy dust
Replacing parts and supplies
Replacing a toner cartridge
1 Open the printer top access cover, and then open the front door.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the photoconductors, do not leave the front door open for
more than 10 minutes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
238
2 Pull the green tabs of the specified cartridge up and out to remove the cartridge from the printer.
3 Unpack the replacement toner cartridge.
4 Place the old cartridge in the recycling bag.
5 Place the bag in the shipping box used for the replacement part.
6 Shake the replacement cartridge front‑to‑back and side‑to‑side to redistribute the toner.
7 Remove the red packing strip from the cartridge.
8 Insert the cartridge into the printer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
239
9 Close the front door, and then close the printer top access cover.
2
1
Note: When print becomes faded, order a new toner cartridge immediately. A message on the printer display
specifies what color cartridge is low in toner. You can try to extend the life of the cartridges by pulling them out of
the printer and shaking them to redistribute the toner.
Replacing the ADF parts
Note: The printer comes with a spare separator pad and air filter, located under the scanner. To access the spare
parts, remove the slotted screw.
Note: It is recommended that the ADF area and parts be cleaned periodically.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
240
Replacing the pick roller assembly
1 Turn the printer off, and then open the ADF cover.
2 Replace the pick roller assembly, as shown.
3 Dispose of the old pick roller assembly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
241
Replacing the separator pad
1 With the ADF cover still open, pull up on the separator pad to remove it.
2 Replace the separator pad.
3 Dispose of the old separator pad.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
242
Replacing the pick pad
1 With the ADF cover still open, pull straight up on the pick pad to remove it.
2 Replace the pick pad with a new one, and then discard the old pad.
3 Open the flap to access the sensor lens underneath, and then wipe the lens clean.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
243
4 Close the flap, and then close the ADF cover.
Replacing the air filter
1 Locate the air filter on the back of the printer, and then remove the cover.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
244
2 Remove the old air filter, and then discard it.
3 Replace the air filter, and then replace the cover.
4 Turn the printer on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
245
Replacing the waste toner bottle
1 Locate the waste toner bottle release button on the left side of the printer.
2 Press the release button to the left, and then pull the waste toner bottle out to remove it from the printer.
1
2
3 Unpack the replacement waste toner bottle.
1
2
4 Peel the seal from the side of the full waste toner bottle, and then place it over the hole to seal off the waste toner
bottle.
1
2
5 Place the sealed waste toner bottle in the recycling bag.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
246
6 Place the bag into the shipping box used for the replacement part.
2
1
7 Peel the recycling label off and place it on the shipping box.
1
2
8 Insert the new waste toner bottle into the printer.
1
2
Replacing a photoconductor
1 Open the top access cover, and then open the front door.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
247
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the photoconductors, do not leave the front door open for
more than 10 minutes.
2 Pull the specified photoconductor up, and then slide it to the right to remove it from the printer.
2
1
3 Unpack the replacement photoconductor.
1
2
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
248
4 Align and insert the left end of the photoconductor, and then press the right end into place.
2
1
5 Remove the red packing strip from the top of the photoconductor.
6 Close the front door, and then close the top access cover.
2
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
249
Resetting the maintenance counter
Reset the maintenance counter after installing the new photoconductors. Use any one of the following procedures:
When a “replace” or “low” message does not appear
Follow this procedure when the photoconductors are replaced and no “replace” or “low” message appears:
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Supplies Menu > Replace Supply.
2 Touch the buttons that indicate which of the four photoconductors you replaced.
• All
• Cyan Photoconductor
• Magenta Photoconductor
• Yellow Photoconductor
• Black Photoconductor
3 When [color] photoconductor replacedappears, touch Yes.
4 Touch
to return to the home screen.
When a “replace” or “low” message appears
Follow this procedure when the photoconductors are replaced and 84 Replace [color] photoconductor,
84 [color] photoconductor nearly low, or 84 [color] photoconductor lowstill appears:
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
Status/Supplies > Supply Replaced
2 When Replaced [color] photoconductorappears, touch Yes.
Notes:
• All four photoconductors should be replaced at the same time for optimum print quality.
• Readyappears when the counter is reset.
Moving the printer
Before moving the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or
printer damage:
• Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
• Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
• Use the handholds located on both sides and rear of the printer to lift it.
• Make sure your fingers are not under the printer when you set it down.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintaining the printer
250
• Before setting up the printer, make sure there is adequate clearance around it.
• Lift the printer off the optional drawer, and set it aside instead of trying to lift the drawer and printer at the same
time.
Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer
warranty.
Moving the printer to another location
The printer and options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions:
• Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer. Any cart
used to move the options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the options.
• Keep the printer in an upright position.
• Avoid severe jarring movements.
Shipping the printer
When shipping the printer, use the original packaging or call the place of purchase for a relocation kit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing the printer
251
Managing the printer
Finding advanced networking and administrator information
This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server. For more advanced system
support tasks, see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD and the Embedded Web Server
Checking the virtual display
1 Open an Embedded Web Server associated with your printer.
Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Check the virtual display that appears in the top left corner of the screen.
The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel, showing printer messages.
Viewing reports
You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server. These reports are useful for assessing the status of the
printer, the network, and supplies.
To view reports from a network printer:
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Reports, and then click the type of report you want to view.
Setting up e‑mail alerts
Configure the printer to send you e‑mail alerts when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs tobe changed
or added, or when there is a paper jam.
1 Type the printer IP address into the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing the printer
252
3 Under Other Settings, click E‑mail Alert Setup.
4 Select the items for notification, and type the e‑mail addresses.
5 Click Submit.
Note: For information on setting up the e‑mail server, contact your system support person.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clearing jams
253
Clearing jams
Carefully select paper and specialty media and load it properly to avoid most jams. For more information, see “Avoiding
jams” on page 253. If jams do occur, follow the steps outlined in this chapter.
Note: Jam recovery is set to Auto by default. The printer reprints jammed pages unless the memory required to hold
the pages is needed for other printer tasks.
Avoiding jams
Load paper properly
• Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
Correct paper loading Incorrect paper loading
• Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing.
• Do not load a tray while the printer is printing. Load it before printing, or wait for a prompt to load it.
• Do not load too much paper. Make sure the stack height does not exceed the maximum paper fill indicator.
• Make sure the guides in the tray or the multipurpose feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing too tightly
against the paper or envelopes.
• Push the tray in firmly after loading paper.
Use recommended paper
• Use only recommended paper or specialty media.
• Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled paper.
• Flex and straighten paper before loading it.
• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
• Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same stack.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clearing jams
254
• Make sure all paper sizes and types are set correctly in the printer control panel menus.
• Store paper per manufacturer recommendations.
Understanding jam numbers and locations
When a jam occurs, a message indicating the jam location appears on the printer display. Open doors and covers, and
remove trays to access jam locations. To resolve any paper jam message, you must clear all jammed papers from the
paper path.
Area name
Jam numbers
200–201
What to do
Inside the printer
Open the front door, and then remove the jammed
paper from behind the toner cartridge area.
Open the front door, and then remove the jammed
paper from under the photoconductor units.
Open the front door, and then remove the jammed
paper from under the fuser.
Inside the printer
202–203
Open the front door, and then remove the jammed
paper from fuser area.
Open the top access cover, and then remove the
jammed paper.
Inside the printer
230
Open the front door, and then remove the jammed
paper located between the front door and Tray 1.
Standard output bin
202–203
Remove all paper from the standard output bin, and
then remove the jammed paper.
Tray [x]
24x
250
Open each tray, and then remove any jams.
Multipurpose feeder
Remove all paper from the multipurpose feeder, and
then remove the jammed paper.
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
Scanner cover
29y.xx
Open the ADF cover, and then remove any jammed
paper.
Open theduplex cover, andthen remove thejammed
paper.
Open the scanner cover, and then remove any
jammed paper.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clearing jams
255
200–201 paper jams
Paper jam in the toner cartridge area
1 Open the printer top access cover.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
2 Open the front door.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the photoconductor units, do not leave the front door
open for more than 10 minutes.
3 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull the paper up and out to remove it from behind
the toner cartridge area.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clearing jams
256
4 Close the front door, and then close the top access cover.
5 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.
Paper jam under the photoconductor units
1 Ope the printer top access cover.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
2 Open the front door.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the photoconductor units, do not leave the front door
open for more than 10 minutes.
3 If lodged under the photoconductor units, then firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull
it out .
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
4 If the jammed paper is lodged too tightly under the photoconductor units, then remove the photoconductor units
and place them on a flat surface.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print
quality of future print jobs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clearing jams
257
1
2
5 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
6 Reinstall each photoconductor unit.
7 Close the front door, and then close the printer top access cover.
8 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.
Paper jam in the fuser area
1 Open the printer top access cover.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
2 Open the front door.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the photoconductor units, do not leave the front door
open for more than 10 minutes.
3 Determine where the jammed paper is located, and then remove it:
a If the jammed paper is visible under the fuser, then firmly grasp the paper on each side, and then gently pull it
out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
b If the jammed paper paper is visible at the top paper guide in the fuser assembly, then firmly grasp the paper
on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clearing jams
258
c If the jammed paper is not visible, then remove the fuser unit:
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the roller at the center of the fuser unit. Doing so may damage
the fuser.
1 Turn the screws on the fuser counterclockwise to loosen them.
2 Using the handholds on each side, lift and pull the fuser out of the printer.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The fuser might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
d Place the fuser on a flat surface with the blue thumb screws facing you.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clearing jams
259
e Pull and then rotate the green rectangular knob clockwise to unlock the top paper guide.
1
2
f Press the green arrow tab to the left, and then lift the top paper guide.
1
2
g Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
h Close the top paper guide. Make sure both sides of the paper guide are firmly seated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clearing jams
260
i
Pull and then rotate the green rectangular knob counterclockwise to firmly secure the top paper guide.
1
2
j
Reinstall the fuser unit:
1 Align the fuser unit using the handholds on each side, and then place it back into the printer.
2 Turn the screws clockwise to fasten the fuser securely.
4 Close the front door, and then close the top access cover.
5 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.
202–203 paper jams
If the jammed paper is visible in the standard exit bin, then firmly grasp the paper on each side, and then gently pull it
out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clearing jams
261
Paper jam in the fuser area
1 Open the printer top access cover.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
2 Open the front door.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the photoconductor units, do not leave the front door
open for more than 10 minutes.
3 Determine where the jammed paper is located, and then remove it:
a If the jammed paper is visible under the fuser, then firmly grasp the paper on each side, and then gently pull it
out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
b If the jammed paper is visible at the top paper guide in the fuser assembly, then firmly grasp the paper on each
side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clearing jams
262
c If the jammed paper is not visible, then remove the fuser unit:
1 Turn the screws on the fuser counterclockwise to loosen them.
2 Using the handholds on each side, lift and pull the fuser out of the printer.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The fuser might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
d Place the fuser on a flat surface with the blue thumb screws facing you.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clearing jams
263
e Pull and then rotate the green rectangular knob clockwise to unlock the top paper guide.
1
2
f Press the green arrow tab to the left, and then lift the top paper guide.
1
2
g Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
h Close the top paper guide. Make sure both sides of the paper guide are firmly seated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clearing jams
264
i
Pull and then rotate the green rectangular knob counterclockwise to firmly secure the top paper guide.
1
2
j
Reinstall the fuser unit:
1 Align the fuser unit using the handholds on each side, and then insert it back into the printer.
2 Turn the screws clockwise to fasten the fuser securely.
4 Close the front door, and then close the top access cover.
5 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clearing jams
265
Paper jam inside the printer top access cover
1 Open the printer top access cover.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid overexposing the photoconductors, do not leave the front door open for
more than 10 minutes.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
2 Open the front door.
3 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
4 Close the front door, and then close the top access cover.
5 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clearing jams
266
24x paper jam
Paper jam in Tray 1
1 Open Tray 1.
2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
3 Close Tray 1.
4 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.
Paper jam in one of the optional trays
1 Open the specified tray.
2 Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clearing jams
267
3 Close the tray.
4 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.
250 paper jam
1 Press the paper release lever, and then remove any jammed pages from the multipurpose feeder.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
1
2
2 Load new paper into the multipurpose feeder.
3 From the printer control panel, touch Continue, jam cleared.
29y.xx paper jams
1 Remove all original documents from the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF).
2 Open the ADF cover, firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clearing jams
268
3 Close the ADF cover.
4 Open the duplex cover, firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
2
1
5 Open the scanner cover, firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clearing jams
269
6 Close the scanner cover.
7 Reload original documents into the ADF, straighten the stack, and then adjust the paper guide.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
270
Troubleshooting
Solving basic printer problems
If there are basic printer problems, or the printer is unresponsive, make sure:
• The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
• The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker.
• The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors, uninterrupted power supplies, or extension cords.
• Other electronic equipment plugged into the outlet is working.
• The printer is turned on. Check the printer power switch.
• The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer, print server, option, or other network
device.
• All options are properly installed.
• The printer driver settings are correct.
Once you have checked each of these possibilities, turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on. This often fixes the problem.
Understanding printer messages
Adjusting color
Wait for the process to complete.
An error has occurred with the USB drive. Please remove and reinsert drive.
Try one or more of the following:
• Remove and reinsert the flash drive.
• If the error message remains, the flash memory may be defective and require replacement.
Change [paper source] to [custom type name]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Use current [paper source] to ignore the message and print from the selected
tray.
• Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the Paper
menu on the printer control panel, and then touch Paper loaded, continue.
• Touch Reset active bin to reset the active tray for a linked set of trays.
Note: This applies only to printers with tray linking capability.
• Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
271
Change [paper source] to [custom string]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Use current [paper source] to ignore the message and print from the selected
tray.
• Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the Paper
menu on the printer control panel, and then touch Paper loaded, continue.
• Touch Reset active bin to reset the active tray for a linked set of trays.
Note: This applies only to printers with tray linking capability.
• Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:
• From the printer control panel, touch Use current [paper source] to ignore the message and print from the selected
tray.
• Load the correct paper size and type in the tray, verify the paper size and type settings are specified in the Paper
menu on the printer control panel, and then touch Paper loaded, continue.
• Touch Reset active bin to reset the active tray for a linked set of trays.
Note: This applies only to printers with tray linking capability.
• Touch Cancel job to cancel the print job.
Close front door
Close the front door of the printer.
Close top access cover
Close the printer top access cover to clear the message.
Disk corrupted
The printer attempted to recover data on a corrupted hard disk. The printer hard disk cannot be repaired.
From the home screen, touch Format disk to reformat the printer hard disk and clear the message.
Note: Formatting deletes all the files stored in the printer hard disk.
Disk full, scan job canceled
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue scanning.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the printer hard disk.
• Install a hard disk with higher capacity.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
272
Disk near full. Securely clearing disk space.
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored on the printer hard disk.
• Install a hard disk with higher capacity.
Disk problem
The printer hard disk must be reformatted.
Touch Format disk to reformat the printer hard disk and clear the message.
Note: Formatting deletes all the files stored on the printer hard disk.
Error reading USB drive. Remove USB.
An unsupported flash drive is inserted. Remove the flash drive, and then install a supported one.
Fax memory full
There is not enough memory to send the fax job.
Touch Continue to clear the message.
Fax partition inoperative. Contact system administrator.
The fax partition appears to be corrupted. Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
• Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer. If the message appears again, then contact your system
support person.
Fax server 'To Format' not set up. Contact system administrator.
The printer is in Fax Server mode, but the Fax Server setup has not been completed.
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
• Complete the Fax Server setup. If the message appears again, contact your system support person.
Fax Station Name not set up
The Fax Station Name has not been entered. Sending and receiving faxes is disabled until fax is configured properly.
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
• Complete the Analog Fax Setup. If the message appears again, contact your system support person.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
273
Fax Station Number not set up
The Fax Station Number has not been entered. Sending and receiving faxes is disabled until fax is configured properly.
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
• Complete the Analog Fax Setup. If the message appears again, contact your system support person.
Insert Tray [x]
Insert the specified tray into the printer.
Install Tray [x]
Try one or more of the following:
• Install the specified tray:
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Install the specified tray.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
• Cancel the print job.
Load [paper source] with [custom type name]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the tray or feeder with the correct paper type and size.
• From the printer control panel, touch Paper loaded, continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot
find a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it prints from the default paper source.
• Cancel the print job.
Load [paper source] with [custom string]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the tray or feeder with the correct paper type and size.
• From the printer control panel, touch Paper loaded, continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot
find a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it prints from the default paper source.
• Cancel the print job.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
274
Load [paper source] with [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the tray or feeder with the correct paper size.
• From the printer control panel, touch Paper loaded, continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot
find a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it feeds from the default paper source.
• Cancel the print job.
Load [paper source] with [paper type] [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the tray or feeder with the correct paper size and type.
• From the printer control panel, touch Paper loaded, continue to clear the message and continue printing.
If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer cannot
find a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it feeds from the default paper source.
• Cancel the print job.
Load Manual Feeder with [custom type name]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the feeder with the correct paper size and type.
• From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear
the message and continue printing.
• Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the print job.
Load Manual Feeder with [custom string]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the feeder with the correct paper size and type.
• From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear
the message and continue printing.
• Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the print job.
Load Manual Feeder with [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the feeder with the correct paper size and type.
• From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear
the message and continue printing.
• Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the print job.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
275
Load Manual Feeder with [paper type] [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the feeder with the correct paper size and type.
• From the printer control panel, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or Do not prompt, paper loaded to clear
the message and continue printing.
• Touch Automatically select paper to use the paper loaded in the tray.
• Cancel the print job.
Memory full, cannot print faxes
There is not enough memory to print the fax job.
Touch Continue to clear the message without printing. Held faxes will attempt to print after the printer has been
restarted.
No analog phone line connected to modem, fax is disabled.
Make sure the analog phone line is plugged into the modem.
Paper changes needed
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Use current supplies to clear the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the current print job.
Remove packaging material, [area name]
Remove any remaining packaging material from the specified location.
Remove paper from standard output bin
Remove the stack of paper from the standard exit bin.
Replace separator pad
Install a new separator pad.
Restore held jobs?
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Restore to restore all held jobs stored on the printer hard disk.
• Touch Do not restore if you do not want any print jobs to be restored.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
276
Scanner ADF Cover Open
The ADF cover is open. The message clears when the cover is closed.
Scan Document Too Long
The scan job exceeds the maximum number of pages. Touch Cancel Job to clear the message.
SMTP server not set up. Contact system administrator.
An error occurred on the SMTP server, or the SMTP server is not configured properly. Touch Continue to clear the
message. If the message appears again, contact your system support person.
Some held jobs were not restored
Touch Continue to delete the specified job.
Note: Held jobs that are not restored stay on the hard disk and are inaccessible.
Supply needed to complete job
A supply needed to complete the job is missing. Try one of the following:
• Touch Prompt for supplies to view all error messages that indicate what supplies are needed to continue processing
the current job.
1 Order the missing supply immediately.
2 Install the supply. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
• Touch Cancel job to clear the message and cancel the print job.
Tray [x] paper size unsupported
The paper size in the specified tray is unsupported. Replace it with a supported paper size.
Unsupported disk
An unsupported disk has been inserted. Remove the unsupported disk, and then install a supported one.
Weblink server not set up. Contact system administrator
An error occurred on the Web link server, or the Web link server is not configured properly.
Touch Continue to clear the message. If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
277
31.xx Missing or defective [color] cartridge
Try one or more of the following:
• Install the missing toner cartridge.
For instructions on removing and installing a cartridge, touch More Information.
• Remove and reinstall the defective toner cartridge.
Note: If the message is not cleared, then replace the defective cartridge.
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
32.xx [color] cartridge part number unsupported by device
Remove the unsupported toner cartridge, and then install a supported one.
34 Incorrect paper size, open [src]
Try one or more of the following:
• Load the appropriate paper or specialty media in the proper tray.
• Confirm that the wheel on tray 1 is set to the paper size loaded in the tray. Make sure this size is the size you are
trying to print.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and print using a different tray.
• Check length and width guides of the tray and make sure the paper is properly loaded in the tray.
• Make sure the Print Properties or Print dialog settings have the correct paper size and type.
• Check that the paper size is correctly set. For example, if the MP Feeder Size is set to Universal, make sure the paper
is large enough for the data being printed.
• Cancel the print job.
35 Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to disable Resource Save and continue printing.
• To enable Resource Save after receiving this message, make sure the link buffers are set to Auto, and then exit the
menus to activate the link buffer changes. When Readyappears, enable Resource Save.
• Install additional memory.
37 Insufficient memory to collate job
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to print the portion of the job already stored and begin collating the rest of the print job.
• Cancel the current print job.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
278
37 Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data in printer memory.
• Install additional printer memory.
37 Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted
The printer deleted some held jobs in order to process current jobs.
Touch Continue to clear the message.
37 Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored
The printer was unable to restore some or all of the confidential or held jobs on the printer hard disk.
Touch Continue to clear the message.
38 Memory full
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Cancel job to clear the message.
• Install additional printer memory.
39 Complex page, some data may not have printed
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the current print job.
• Install additional printer memory.
51 Defective flash detected
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Cancel the current print job.
52 Not enough free space in flash memory for resources
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Downloaded fonts and macros not previously stored in flash memory are deleted.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in flash memory.
• Upgrade to a larger capacity flash memory card.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
279
53 Unformatted flash detected
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to stop the defragment operation and continue printing.
• Format the flash memory. If the error message remains, the flash memory may be defective and require replacing.
54 Network [x] software error
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to continue printing.
• Turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
• Upgrade (flash) the network firmware in the printer.
54 Serial option [x] error
Try one or more of the following:
• Check that the serial cable is properly connected and is the correct one for the serial port.
• Check that the serial interface parameters (protocol, baud, parity, and data bits) are set correctly on the printer
and host computer.
• Touch Continue to continue printing.
• Turn the printer power off and then back on to reset the printer.
54 Standard network software error
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to continue printing.
• Turn the printer off and then back on to reset the printer.
• Upgrade (flash) the network firmware in the printer or print server.
55 Unsupported option in slot [x]
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the unsupported option card from the printer system board, and then replace it with a supported card.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
280
56 Parallel port [x] disabled
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the parallel port.
• Make sure the Parallel Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.
56 Serial port [x] disabled
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the serial port.
• Make sure the Serial Buffer menu is not set to Disabled.
56 Standard USB port disabled
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
• Make sure the USB Buffer menu item is not set to Disabled.
56 USB port [x] disabled
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
• Make sure the USB Buffer menu is not set to Disabled.
57 Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored
Something has changed in the printer to invalidate the held jobs. Possible changes include:
• The printer firmware has been updated.
• Paper input options needed for the print job were removed.
• The print job was created using data from a device in the USB port and the device is no longer in the USB port.
• The printer hard disk contains print jobs that were stored while installed in a different printer model.
Touch Continue to clear the message.
58 Input config error
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Check if all tray configurations are correct. Remove unnecessary trays if needed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
281
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
58 Too many disks installed
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the excess disks.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
58 Too many flash options installed
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the excess flash memory.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
58 Too many trays attached
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
3 Remove the additional trays.
4 Connect the power cord to a properly grounded outlet.
5 Turn the printer back on.
59 Incompatible tray [x]
Try one or more of the following:
• Remove the specified tray.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing without using the specified tray.
61 Remove defective disk
Try one or more of the following:
• Remove the defective printer hard disk.
• Install a different printer hard disk before performing any operations that require a printer hard disk.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
282
62 Disk full
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing.
• Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored on the printer hard disk.
• Install a printer hard disk with larger capacity.
63 Unformatted disk
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
• Format the printer hard disk.
If the error message remains, the hard disk may be defective and require replacing.
80.xx Fuser near life warning
1 Order a replacement fuser immediately.
2 When print quality is reduced, install the new fuser, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement
part.
3 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
80.xx Fuser life warning
• Order a replacement fuser immediately. When print quality is reduced, install the new fuser, following the
instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
• Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
80.xx Replace fuser
Replace the fuser using the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
80.xx Fuser missing
1 Replace the fuser, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
82.xx Replace waste toner bottle
1 Replace the waste toner bottle.
For instructions on replacing the waste toner bottle, from the printer control panel touch More Information.
2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
283
82.xx Waste toner bottle missing
Reinsert the waste toner bottle into the printer.
82.xx Waste toner bottle nearly full
Order a replacement waste toner bottle immediately.
1 Replace the waste toner bottle.
For instructions on installing the waste toner bottle, from the printer control panel touch More Information.
2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
83.xx Replace transfer module
Replace the transfer module, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
83.xx Transfer module life warning
1 Replace the transfer module, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
83.xx Transfer module missing
Insert the transfer module into the printer.
83.xx Transfer module near life warning
1 Order a replacement transfer module immediately.
2 From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
3 When print quality is reduced, install the new transfer module.
For instructions on installing the transfer module, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part
or touch More Information on the printer home screen.
84.xx [color] photoconductor missing
Install the specified color photoconductor, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
84.xx [color] photoconductor nearly low
1 Order a replacement photoconductor.
2 When print quality is reduced, install the new photoconductor, following the instruction sheet that came with the
replacement part.
3 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
284
84.xx [Color] photoconductor low
1 Order a replacement photoconductor immediately.
2 When print quality is reduced, install the new photoconductor, following the instruction sheet that came with the
replacement supply.
Notes:
• All four photoconductors should be replaced at the same time.
• Make sure to reset the maintenance counter after replacing the photoconductors for optimum print quality.
3 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
84.xx Replace [color] photoconductor
1 Replace the photoconductor, following the instruction sheet that came with the replacement supply.
Notes:
• All four photoconductors should be replaced at the same time.
• Make sure to reset the maintenance counter after replacing the photoconductors for optimum print quality.
2 From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
88 Replace [color] cartridge
The specified print or toner cartridge is empty.
1 Replace the specified cartridge.
For instructions on replacing cartridge, from the printer control panel, touch More Information.
2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
88.xx [Color] cartridge critically low
The specified print cartridge is critically low.
1 For instructions on replacing a print cartridge, from the printer control panel touch More Information.
2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
88.xx [color] cartridge low
1 Remove the specified cartridge.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print
quality of future print jobs.
2 Firmly shake the cartridge side‑to‑side and front‑to‑back several times to redistribute the toner.
3 Reinsert the cartridge, and then touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
285
Notes:
• Repeat this procedure multiple times until the print remains faded. When the print remains faded, replace the
cartridge.
• Have a new cartridge available when the current one no longer prints satisfactorily.
88.xx [color] cartridge nearly low
Order a replacement for the specified print cartridge.
88.xx [Color] cartridge very low
The specified print cartridge is very low.
1 For instructions on replacing a print cartridge, from the printer control panel touch More Information.
2 Touch Continue to clear the message and continue printing.
29y.xx Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Cancel job to cancel the job and clear the message.
• Touch Scan from automatic feeder to resume the scan job from the ADF immediately following the last successfully
scanned page.
• Touch Scan from flatbed to resume the scan job from the scanner glass immediately following the last successfully
scanned page.
• Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the scan job at the last successfully scanned page.
Note: This does not cancel the scan job. All successfully scanned pages will be processed further for copying,
faxing, and e-mailing.
280.06 Paper missing
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue to clear the message.
• Touch Cancel job to cancel the job and clear the message.
• Touch Scan from automatic feeder to resume the scan job from the ADF immediately following the last successfully
scanned page.
• Touch Scan from flatbed to resume the scan job from the scanner glass immediately following the last successfully
scanned page.
• Touch Finish job without further scanning to end the scan job at the last successfully scanned page.
Note: This does not cancel the scan job. All successfully scanned pages will be processed further for copying,
faxing, or e‑mailing.
• Touch Restart job to clear the message and start a new scan job with the same settings as the previous job.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
286
840.01 Scanner disabled by admin
Print without the scanner or contact your system support person.
840.02 Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem persists.
Try one or more of the following:
• Touch Continue with scanner disabled to return to the home screen, and then contact your system support person.
• Touch Reboot and automatically enable scanner to cancel the job.
Note: This attempts to bring the scanner back online.
1565 Emulation error, load emulation option
The printer automatically clears the message in 30 seconds, and then disables the download emulator on the firmware
card.
Solving printing problems
Multiple‑language PDF files do not print
The PDF files may contain unavailable fonts.
1 Open the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat.
2 Click the printer icon > Advanced > Print as image > OK > OK.
Printer control panel display is blank or displays only diamonds
The printer self test failed. Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.
If Readydoes not appear, then turn the printer off and contact Customer Support.
Error message about reading USB drive appears
Make sure the flash drive is supported.
Print jobs do not print
Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO PROBLEM WITH YOUR PRINTER
From the printer control panel, check the status. If necessary, follow the recovery instructions.
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS READY TO PRINT
Make sure Readyappears on the display before sending a print job.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
287
CHECK IF A SUPPLY IS MISSING OR NEEDS REPLACEMENT
Remove and then reinstall or replace the supply.
CHECK IF THE STANDARD EXIT BIN IS FULL
Remove the paper stack from the standard exit bin.
CHECK IF THE PAPER TRAY IS EMPTY
Load paper in the tray.
MAKE SURE THE CORRECT PRINTER SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED
• Verify that you are using the correct printer software.
• If the printer is connected to your computer through a USB port, then make sure you are running a supported
operating system and using a compatible printer software.
MAKE SURE THE INTERNAL PRINT SERVER IS WORKING PROPERLY
• Make sure the internal print server is properly installed and that the printer is connected to the network.
• Print a network setup page and check that the status shows Connected. If the status is Not Connected,
then check the network cables, and then try printing the network setup page again. Contact your system support
person to make sure the network is functioning correctly.
MAKE SURE YOU ARE USING A RECOMMENDED USB, SERIAL, OR ETHERNET CABLE
MAKE SURE PRINTER CABLES ARE SECURELY CONNECTED
Check the cable connections to the printer and print server to make sure they are secure.
For more information, see the setup documentation that came with the printer.
Confidential and other held jobs do not print
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
PARTIAL JOB, NO JOB, OR BLANK PAGE PRINTS
The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data.
• Delete the print job, and then print it again.
• For PDF documents, recreate the PDF and then print it again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
288
If you are printing from the Internet, then the printer may be reading multiple job titles as duplicates and deleting
all jobs except the first one.
• For Windows users, open Print Properties. From the Print and Hold dialog, select the "Keep duplicate documents"
check box under the User name text box before entering a PIN number.
• For Macintosh users, save each print job, naming each job differently, and then send the individual jobs to the
printer.
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS SUFFICIENT MEMORY
Free up additional printer memory by scrolling through the list of held jobs and deleting some of them.
Print job takes longer than expected
Try one or more of the following:
REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB
Eliminate the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages in the print
job.
TURN OFF THE PAGE PROTECT SETTING
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery > Page Protect > Off >
CHANGE THE ENVIRONMENTAL SETTINGS
When using Eco‑Mode or Quiet Mode settings, you may notice a reduction in performance.
Printing slows down
Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE TO USE PAPER NOT NARROW ENOUGH TO INVOKE THE SLOWDOWN MODE
Place larger paper such as Letter and A4 in the tray, and then print the same file.
Note: The slowdown mode functions as designed. This is to protect the fuser from becoming damaged by large
temperature differentials across its length.
CONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT
If the problem continues, then the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact customer support.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
289
Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND PAPER SIZE SETTINGS
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the paper type and paper size settings.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the paper type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the paper type from the Print dialog.
Incorrect characters print
• Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode. If Ready Hexappears on the display, you must exit Hex Trace
mode before you can print your job. Turn the printer off and back on to exit Hex Trace mode.
• Make sure the SmartSwitch settings are set to On in the Network and USB menus.
Tray linking does not work
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
LOAD THE SAME SIZE AND TYPE OF PAPER
• Load the same size and type of paper in each tray to be linked.
• Move the paper guides to the correct positions for the paper size loaded in each tray.
USE THE SAME PAPER SIZE AND PAPER TYPE SETTINGS
• Print a menu settings page and compare the settings for each tray.
• If necessary, adjust the settings from the Paper Size/Type menu.
Note: The standard 550-sheet tray and the multipurpose feeder do not automatically sense the paper size. You
must set the size from the Paper Size/Type menu.
Large jobs do not collate
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE COLLATE IS SET TO ON
From the Finishing menu or Print Properties, set Collate to On.
Note: Setting Collate to Off in the software overrides the setting in the Finishing menu.
REDUCE THE COMPLEXITY OF THE PRINT JOB
Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of
images, and the number of pages in the job.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
290
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS ENOUGH MEMORY
Add printer memory or an optional hard disk.
Unexpected page breaks occur
INCREASE THE PRINT TIMEOUT VALUE
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts
2 Touch the left or right arrow next to Print Timeoutuntil the desired value appears.
3 Touch Submit.
Solving copy problems
Copier does not respond
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
CHECK THE POWER
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Readyappears.
Scanner unit does not close
Make sure there are no obstructions:
1 Lift the scanner unit.
2 Remove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open.
3 Lower the scanner unit.
Poor copy quality
These are some examples of poor copy quality:
• Blank pages
• Checkerboard pattern
• Distorted graphics or pictures
• Missing characters
• Faded print
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
291
• Dark print
• Skewed lines
• Smudges
• Streaks
• Unexpected characters
• White lines in print
Try one or more of the following:
CLEAR ANY ERROR MESSAGES
Check the display and clear any error messages.
REPLACE THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE
When the print remains faded, replace the toner or print cartridge.
CLEAN THE SCANNER GLASS
The scanner glass may be dirty. Clean the scanner glass with a clean, lint‑free cloth dampened with water.
For more information, see “Cleaning the scanner glass” on page 229.
ADJUST THE TONER DARKNESS OF THE COPY
Adjust the toner darkness from the Copy menus.
MAKE SURE THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT IS SATISFACTORY
Check the quality of the original document.
PLACE THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT PROPERLY
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
MAKE SURE TO USE THE APPROPRIATE COPY SETTINGS
When patterns (moiré) appear in the output:
• On the Copy screen make sure the Content Type and Source settings are appropriate for the document being
scanned.
• From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Sharpness > lower the Sharpness setting
• On the Copy screen, make sure no scaling is being selected.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
292
When the text is light or disappearing:
• From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Content > Text >
> select the appropriate source for the original document being copied >
• From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Sharpness > increase the current setting
• From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Background removal, and then reduce the current setting
• From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Contrast > increase the current setting
• From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Shadow detail > reduce the current setting
When the output appears washed out or overexposed:
• On the Copy screen make sure the Content Type and Source settings are appropriate for the document being
scanned.
• From the Copy screen, adjust the Darkness setting.
• From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Shadow detail > reduce the current setting
• From the Copy screen, navigate to:
Advanced Options > Advanced Imaging > Background removal > reduce the current setting
Partial document or photo copies
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
• For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
293
Solving scanner problems
Checking an unresponsive scanner
If your scanner is not responding, then make sure:
• The printer is turned on.
• The printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the host computer, print server, option, or other network
device.
• The power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical outlet.
• The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker.
• The printer is not plugged into any surge protectors, uninterrupted power supplies, or extension cords.
• Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working.
Once you have checked each of these possibilities, turn the printer off and then back on. This often fixes the problem
with the scanner.
Scan was not successful
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS
Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.
AN ERROR MAY HAVE OCCURRED IN THE PROGRAM
Turn off and then restart the computer.
Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
OTHER SOFTWARE PROGRAMS MAY BE INTERFERING WITH SCANNING
Close all programs not being used.
THE SCAN RESOLUTION MAY BE SET TOO HIGH
Select a lower scan resolution.
Poor scanned image quality
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
294
THE SCANNER GLASS MAY BE DIRTY
Clean the scanner glass with a clean, lint‑free cloth dampened with water. For more information, see “Cleaning the
ADJUST THE SCAN RESOLUTION
Increase the resolution of the scan for a higher quality output.
CHECK THE QUALITY OF THE ORIGINAL DOCUMENT
Make sure the quality of the original document is satisfactory.
CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Partial document or photo scans
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DOCUMENT PLACEMENT
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel, check the Paper Size setting from the Paper menu.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
• For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.
Cannot scan from a computer
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
CHECK THE POWER
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Readyappears.
CHECK THE CABLE CONNECTIONS
Make sure the network or USB cable is securely connected to the computer and the printer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
295
Solving fax problems
Fax and e-mail functions are not set up
The indicator light blinks red until you set up fax and e‑mail. To set up fax and e‑mail, follow these steps:
Note: Before completing these instructions for a printer on a network, make sure the fax cables are connected.
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> General Settings > Run initial setup > Yes > Submit
2 Turn the printer off, and then turn it back on.
3 From the printer control panel, touch your language.
4 Touch your country or region, and then touch Continue.
5 Select your time zone, and then touch Continue.
6 Touch Fax and E‑mail to clear the icons, and then touch Continue.
Note: You can use these same steps to disable fax and e‑mail.
Caller ID is not shown
Contact your telecommunications company to verify that your telephone line is subscribed to the caller ID service.
If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns, you may have to change the default setting. There are two settings
available: FSK (pattern 1) and DTMF (pattern 2). The availability of these settings by way of the Fax menu depends on
whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID patterns. Contact your telecommunications company to
determine which pattern or switch setting to use.
Cannot send or receive a fax
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DISPLAY FOR ERROR MESSAGES
Clear any error messages.
CHECK THE POWER
Make sure the printer is plugged in, the power is on, and Readyappears.
CHECK THE PRINTER CONNECTIONS
Make sure the cable connections for the following hardware are secure, if applicable:
• Telephone
• Handset
• Answering machine
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
296
CHECK THE TELEPHONE WALL JACK
1 Plug a telephone into the wall jack.
2 Listen for a dial tone.
3 If you do not hear a dial tone, then plug a different telephone into the wall jack.
4 If you still do not hear a dial tone, then plug a telephone into a different wall jack.
5 If you hear a dial tone, then connect the printer to that wall jack.
REVIEW THIS DIGITAL PHONE SERVICE CHECKLIST
The fax modem is an analog device. Certain devices can be connected to the printer so that digital telephone services
can be used.
• If you are using an ISDN telephone service, then connect the printer to an analog telephone port (an R-interface
port) on an ISDN terminal adapter. For more information and to request an R-interface port, contact your ISDN
provider.
• If you are using DSL, then connect to a DSL filter or router that will support analog use. For more information,
contact your DSL provider.
• If you are using a PBX telephone service, then make sure you are connecting to an analog connection on the PBX.
If none exists, consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine.
CHECK FOR A DIAL TONE
• Place a test call to the telephone number to which you want to send a fax to make sure that it is working correctly.
• If the telephone line is being used by another device, then wait until the other device is finished before sending
a fax.
• If you are using the On Hook Dial feature, then turn up the volume to verify a dial tone.
TEMPORARILY DISCONNECT OTHER EQUIPMENT
To ensure the printer is working correctly, connect it directly to the telephone line. Disconnect any answering
machines, computers with modems, or telephone line splitters.
CHECK FOR JAMS
Clear any jams, and then make sure that Readyappears.
TEMPORARILY DISABLE CALL WAITING
Call Waiting can disrupt fax transmissions. Disable this feature before sending or receiving a fax. Call your telephone
company to obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling Call Waiting.
VOICE MAIL SERVICE MAY BE INTERFERING WITH THE FAX TRANSMISSION
Voice Mail offered through your local telephone company may disrupt fax transmissions. To enable both Voice Mail
and the printer to answer calls, you may want to consider adding a second telephone line for the printer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
297
THE PRINTER MEMORY MAY BE FULL
1 Dial the fax number.
2 Scan the original document one page at a time.
Can send but not receive faxes
Try one or more of the following:
LOAD PAPER
If the tray is empty, then load paper in the tray or feeder.
CHECK THE RING COUNT DELAY SETTINGS
The ring count delay sets the number of times the phone rings before the printer answers. If you have extension
phones on the same line as the printer, or subscribe to the telephone company's Distinctive Ring service, then keep
the Ring Delay setting at 4.
1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:
• View the IP address on the printer control panel in the TCP/IP section under the Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages and locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3 In the Rings to Answer field, enter the number of times you want the phone to ring before the printer answers.
4 Click Submit.
REPLACE THE TONER OR PRINT CARTRIDGE
Replace the toner or print cartridge.
Can receive but not send faxes
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
THE PRINTER IS NOT IN FAX MODE
On the home screen, touch Fax to put the printer in Fax mode.
THE DOCUMENT IS NOT LOADED PROPERLY
Load the original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left
corner.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
298
MAKE SURE THE SHORTCUT NUMBER IS SET UP PROPERLY
• Check to make sure the shortcut number has been programmed for the number that you want to dial.
• As an alternative, dial the telephone number manually.
Received fax has poor print quality
Try one or more of the following:
RESEND THE DOCUMENT
Ask the person who sent you the fax to:
• Check that the quality of the original document is satisfactory.
• Resend the fax. There may have been a problem with the quality of the telephone line connection.
• Increase the fax scan resolution, if possible.
REPLACE THE CARTRIDGE
When 88 Cartridge lowappears or when the prints appear faded, replace the cartridge.
MAKE SURE THE FAX TRANSMISSION SPEED IS NOT SET TOO HIGH
Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed:
1 Type the printer IP address in the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then print a network setup page and locate the IP
address in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3 In the Max Speed box, click one of the following:
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
4 Click Submit.
Solving home screen applications problems
An application error has occurred
CHECK THE SYSTEM LOG FOR RELEVANT DETAILS
1 Type the printer IP address or host name in the address field of your Web browser.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
299
If you do not know the IP address or host name of the printer, then you can:
• View the information on the printer control panel home screen, or in the TCP/IP section under the
Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or menu settings page, and then locate the information in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings or Configuration.
3 Click Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF), or click Embedded Solutions.
4 Click System tab > Log
5 From the Filter menu, select an application status.
6 From the Application menu, select an application, and then click Submit.
MAKE SURE THE FILE NAME YOU WANT TO SCAN TO IS NOT ALREADY IN USE
Verify that the file to which you want to scan is not open by another application or user.
To help prevent errors, make sure either Append time stamp or Overwrite existing file is selected in the destination
configuration settings.
ADJUST THE SCAN SETTINGS
In the destination configuration settings, lower the scan settings. For example, to lower the scan resolution, disable
Color, or change the “Content type” setting to Text.
CONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT
If you still cannot isolate the problem, then contact customer support.
Forms and Favorites troubleshooting
Forms are not available or are not working
MAKE SURE THE BOOKMARK POINTING TO THE FORM IS IN THE BOOKMARKS ROOT FOLDER
If the bookmark pointing to the form was created in a subfolder of the Bookmarks folder, then it will not be available
under the Forms solution. Delete the bookmark and recreate it under the Bookmarks root folder.
MAKE SURE THE BOOKMARK IS POINTING TO THE CORRECT LOCATION
The printer does not validate bookmarks. If the URL or network location that was specified when the bookmark was
created is incorrect, then the printer will not be able to access the document.
MAKE SURE THE BOOKMARK IS CREATED WITH FORMS AND FAVORITES
If the bookmark is created using another application, then it cannot be accessed in Forms and Favorites.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
300
A network destination stopped working or is invalid
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER AUTHENTICATION IS CONFIGURED
If the application is configured to use MFP authentication credentials, then the printer authentication settings must
be configured from the Embedded Web Server.
For more information on configuring the printer authentication settings, see the Embedded Web Server
MAKE SURE DESTINATION IS SHARED AND HAS A VALID NETWORK ADDRESS
Check that the folder or source file is set to be shared across the network.
If the destination has been moved, then the network address may have changed. The destination network address
can be accessed from the Embedded Web Server.
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS CONNECTED TO THE NETWORK
Make sure that all appropriate network cables are securely connected and that the network settings of the printer
are correctly configured. For information on networking the printer, see the Networking Guide on the Software and
Documentation CD that came with the printer.
IF THE SOURCE FILE AND PRINTER RESIDE IN DIFFERENT DOMAINS, THEN MAKE SURE THE DOMAIN INFORMATION IS SPECIFIED
If the source file exists within a different domain than the printer, then you can edit the destination from the
application configuration page and enter the appropriate domain information in the Network Address and Network
Domain fields. If you do not know the network address of the computer where your source file resides, then consult
your system support person.
You can also add the domain name to the Domain Search Order list under the printer network setup.
CHECK THE SYSTEM LOG FOR RELEVANT DETAILS
1 Type the printer IP address or host name in the address field of your Web browser.
If you do not know the IP address or host name of the printer, then you can:
• View the information on the printer control panel home screen, or in the TCP/IP section under the
Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Settings or Configuration.
3 Click Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF), or click Embedded Solutions.
4 Click System tab > Log.
5 From the Filter menu, select an application status.
6 From the Application menu, select an application, and then click Submit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
301
Scan to Network troubleshooting
The application icon is missing from the home screen
MAKE SURE TO ENABLE AT LEAST ONE VALID DESTINATION
DISPLAY THE APPLICATION ICON WHEN NO DESTINATIONS ARE AVAILABLE
1 From the Embedded Web Server, click Settings or Configuration.
2 Click Device Solutions > Solutions (eSF), or click Embedded Solutions.
3 Click the name of the application > Configure.
4 From the Home Screen Button section, select Always show button under Display Option, and then click Apply.
Printer cannot scan to the selected destination
MAKE SURE THE DESTINATION IS VALID
Verify that the destination is valid in the application configuration settings.
If the destination has been moved, then the network address may have changed. The destination network address
can be accessed from the Embedded Web Server.
IF THE PRINTER AND DESTINATION RESIDE IN DIFFERENT DOMAINS, THEN MAKE SURE THE DOMAIN INFORMATION IS SPECIFIED
If the destination exists within a different Windows domain than the printer, then you can edit the destination from
the application configuration page and enter the appropriate Windows domain information in the domain field as
part of the Network Folder Address. You can also add the domain name to the Domain Search Order list under the
printer network setup.
MAKE SURE THE FIREWALL SOFTWARE IS ALLOWING COMMUNICATION
If the destination resides on a computer that uses a newer version of the Windows operating system (Windows XP
or later), and the Windows Firewall is enabled, then the printer may have difficulty sending information to the
destination if the destination and the printer reside on different subnets. The Windows Firewall must either be
configured to allow communication with the subnet the printer resides on, or the destination should be set up on
the same subnet as the printer. For more information, contact your system support person.
MAKE SURE A FILE WITH THE DEFAULT FILE NAME DOES NOT ALREADY EXIST IN THE DESTINATION
If the three configuration settings for the File Name section of the application configuration page are not selected
(allow user to enter file name; append time stamp; overwrite existing file), and a file using the default file name
already exists within the destination, then there will be no method in place to distinguish the newly scanned file from
the file present in the destination. The printer will not be able to overwrite the old file, the new file will not receive
a time stamp to differentiate it from the old file, and the user will not be able to give the new file a different name.
In this case, the old file must either be removed from the destination, or one of the previously mentioned settings
must be turned on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
302
MAKE SURE THE NETWORK IS FUNCTIONING AND THE PRINTER CAN COMMUNICATE
Verify all network connections and that the network settings of the printer are configured appropriately. For
information on networking the printer, see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD that came
with the printer.
FOR NETWORKS USING LDAP AUTHENTICATION, MAKE SURE LDAP SETTINGS HAVE BEEN CONFIGURED CORRECTLY
Verify that LDAP settings are configured appropriately in your printer setup, and in the setup dialog. For more
information on LDAP settings, contact your system support person.
MAKE SURE YOU HAVE PERMISSION TO SAVE SCANS TO THIS DESTINATION
On the application Edit Destination screen, clear the contents of the Path Suffix field; or on the destination server,
change the user home folder to match the contents of the Path Suffix field.
My MFP troubleshooting
Error reading USB drive
Some flash drives may not be compatible with the printer. At a minimum, the flash drive should:
• Be USB 2.0‑compatible
• Support the Full Speed standard (low‑speed devices will not work)
• Have a USB type “A” connector
• Support the FAT file system (NTFS file system not supported)
Nothing happens when USB drive is inserted
If nothing happens within a few seconds after you insert your USB drive into the MFP, then use of USB drives may be
disabled on the device. Contact your system support person for more information.
I forgot the password to My MFP
If you forget the password for your My MFP profile, then you must delete the profile from your USB drive, insert the
drive into an MFP, and then run the setup wizard again. To manually delete the My MFP profile from your USB drive:
1 Insert your USB drive into a computer.
2 Locate the .mymfp.preferences file, aswell as any other files beginning with .mymfp (they will be grouped together).
3 Delete all files beginning with .mymfp.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
303
Solving option problems
Option does not operate correctly or quits after it is installed
Try one or more of the following:
RESET THE PRINTER
Turn the printer off, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.
CHECK TO SEE IF THE OPTION IS CONNECTED TO THE PRINTER
1 Turn the printer off using the power switch.
2 Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, and then from the printer.
3 Check the connection between the option and the printer.
MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY
Print a menu settings page and check to see if the option is listed in the Installed Options list. If the option is not
listed, then reinstall it. For more information, see the hardware setup documentation that came with the option, or
MAKE SURE THE OPTION IS SELECTED
From the computer you are printing from, select the option.
Paper tray problems
Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THE PAPER IS LOADED CORRECTLY
1 Open the paper tray.
2 Check for paper jams or misfeeds.
3 Make sure the paper guides are aligned against the edges of the paper.
4 Make sure the paper tray closes properly.
RESET THE PRINTER
Turn the printer off, wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
304
MAKE SURE THE PAPER TRAY IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY
If the paper tray is listed on the menu settings page, but paper jams when it enters or exits the tray, then it may not
be properly installed. Reinstall the paper tray. For more information, see the hardware setup documentation that
came with the paper tray, or go to http://support.lexmark.com to view the paper tray instruction sheet.
2,000-sheet drawer problems
CHECK THE DRAWER CONNECTION
Make sure the 2,000‑sheet drawer is properly connected to the printer.
LOAD PAPER
If the tray is empty, then load paper in the tray or feeder.
CLEAR ANY JAMS
Open the tray or feeder, and then remove any jammed paper.
AVOID PAPER JAMS
• Flex the paper.
• Make sure the drawer is properly installed.
• Make sure paper is loaded correctly.
• Make sure the paper stack you load does not exceed the maximum fill line indicated in the tray.
• Make sure the paper or specialty media meets specifications and is not damaged.
• Make sure the guides are positioned correctly for the paper size loaded.
Memory card
Make sure the memory card is securely connected to the printer system board.
Cannot detect flash memory card
Make sure the flash memory card is securely connected to the printer system board.
Cannot detect printer hard disk
Make sure the printer hard disk is securely connected to the printer system board.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
305
Internal Solutions Port does not operate correctly
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE INTERNAL SOLUTIONS PORT (ISP) CONNECTIONS
Make sure the ISP is securely connected to the printer system board.
CHECK THE CABLE
Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected to the Internal Solutions (ISP) port.
MAKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY
For information on installing the network printing software, see the Networking Guide on the Software and
Documentation CD.
Internal print server does not operate correctly
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PRINT SERVER CONNECTIONS
• Make sure the internal print server is attached securely to the printer system board.
• Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected.
MAKE SURE THE NETWORK SOFTWARE IS CONFIGURED CORRECTLY
For more information on installing the network printing software, do the following:
1 Open the Software and Documentation CD.
2 Click Additional.
3 Under Publications on this CD, select Networking Guide.
USB/parallel interface card does not operate correctly
CHECK THE USB/PARALLEL INTERFACE CARD CONNECTION
Make sure the USB/parallel interface card is securely connected to the printer system board.
CHECK THE CABLE
Make sure you are using the correct cable and that it is securely connected.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
306
Solving paper feed problems
Paper frequently jams
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PAPER
Use recommended paper and specialty media. For more information, see the chapter about paper and specialty
media guidelines.
MAKE SURE THERE IS NOT TOO MUCH PAPER IN THE PAPER TRAY
Make sure the paper does not exceed the maximum paper fill indicator located in the tray or feeder.
MAKE SURE THE ENTIRE PAPER STACK IS SITTING FLAT IN THE TRAY
Before loading the paper, do the following:
• Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them. Do not fold or crease the paper.
• Straighten the edges on a level surface.
CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE
The paper may have absorbed moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared
CHECK THE PAPER PATH
The paper path is not clear. Clear jammed paper from the entire paper path, and then touch Continue.
Jammed pages are not reprinted
TURN ON JAM RECOVERY
1 From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery
2 Touch the arrows next to Jam Recoveryuntil Onor Autoappears.
3 Touch Submit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
307
Solving print quality problems
If these suggestions do not correct the problem, then contact customer support. You may have a printer part that
requires adjustment or replacement.
Characters have jagged or uneven edges
If you are using downloaded fonts, verify that the fonts are supported by the printer, the host computer, and the
software program.
Clipped images
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE GUIDES
Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Size setting.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
• For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.
Fine horizontal lines appear on color pages
You may notice fine, horizontal lines in photographs or pages with a high concentration of color. This can occur when
the printer is in Quiet Mode. To fix this, set Quiet Mode to Off (Image/Photo).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
308
Gray background
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
CHECK THE TONER DARKNESS SETTING
Select a lighter Toner Darkness setting:
• From the printer control panel Quality menu, change the setting.
• For Windows users, change the setting from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, change the setting from the Print dialog.
THE TONER CARTRIDGE MAY BE WORN OR DEFECTIVE
Replace the toner cartridge.
Incorrect margins
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
These are possible solutions. Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES
Move the guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
CHECK THE PAPER SIZE SETTING
Make sure the paper size setting matches the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Size setting.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct size setting:
• For Windows users, specify the size from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the size from the Page Setup dialog.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
309
Light colored line, white line, or incorrectly colored line appears on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE TONER CARTRIDGE
Replace the defective toner cartridge.
MAKE SURE THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT IS NOT DEFECTIVE
Replace the defective photoconductor unit.
MAKE SURE THE TRANSFER MODULE IS NOT DEFECTIVE
Replace the defective transfer module.
CLEAN THE PRINTHEAD LENSES
1 Open the front door, and then the internal cover.
2 Locate the printhead wipers.
3 Gently pull the printhead wiper out until it stops, and then slowly slide it back into place.
4 Clean the remaining three printhead lenses.
Paper curl
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS
Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings.
2 Before sending the print job, specify the correct paper type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the paper type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the paper type from the Print dialog.
LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE
Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
310
Print irregularities
Try one or more of the following:
LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE
The paper may have absorbed moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS
Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings.
2 Before sending the print job, specify the correct paper type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the paper type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the paper type from the Print dialog.
AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE TONER CARTRIDGE
Replace the worn or defective toner cartridge.
MAKE SURE THE TRANSFER MODULE IS NOT DEFECTIVE
Replace the defective transfer module. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the
replacement part.
MAKE SURE THE FUSER IS NOT DEFECTIVE
Replace the defective fuser. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement part.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
311
Print is too dark
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DARKNESS, BRIGHTNESS, AND CONTRAST SETTINGS
The Toner Darkness setting may be too dark, the Brightness setting may be too dark, or the Contrast setting may be
too high.
• Change these settings from the printer control panel Quality menu.
• For Windows users, change these settings from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users:
1 Choose File > Print.
2 From the “Orientation pictures” menu, choose Printer Features.
3 Choose a lower value for the Toner Darkness, Brightness, and Contrast settings.
LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE
The paper may have absorbed moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:
• From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
• For Windows users, check this setting from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, check this setting from the Print dialog.
Print is too light
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
312
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE DARKNESS, BRIGHTNESS, AND CONTRAST SETTINGS
The Toner Darkness setting may be too light, the Brightness setting may be too light, or the Contrast setting may be
too low.
• Change these settings from the printer control panel Quality menu.
• For Windows users, change these settings from Print Properties
• For Macintosh users:
1 Choose File > Print.
2 From the print options pop-up menu, choose Printer Features.
3 Choose a higher value for the Toner Darkness, Brightness, and Contrast settings.
LOAD PAPER FROM A FRESH PACKAGE
The paper may have absorbed moisture from high humidity. Store paper in its original wrapper until you use it.
AVOID TEXTURED PAPER WITH ROUGH FINISHES
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the Paper Type setting matches the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:
• From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
• For Windows users, check this setting from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, check this setting from the Print dialog.
MAKE SURE THE PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER
1 Remove the cartridge.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print
quality of future print jobs.
2 Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.
3 Reinsert the cartridge.
Note: If print quality does not improve, then replace the cartridge of the color that is not printing.
CONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT
If the problem continues, then the printer may need to be serviced.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
313
Printer is printing blank pages
Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO PACKING MATERIAL LEFT ON THE PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE
Remove the cartridge and make sure the packing material is properly removed. Reinstall the cartridge.
MAKE SURE THE PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER
1 Remove the cartridge.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print
quality of future print jobs.
2 Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.
3 Reinsert the cartridge.
Note: If print quality does not improve, then replace the cartridge of the color that is not printing.
CONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT
If the problem continues, then the printer may need to be serviced.
Repeating defects appear on prints
)
)
)
Try one or more of the following:
REPLACE THE PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE
Replace the cartridge of the color with the repeating defect, if the defects occur in the following instances:
• Every 33 mm (1.30 in.) of the page
• Every 35.3 mm (1.39 in.) of the page
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
314
REPLACE THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR
Replace the photoconductor of the color with the repeating defect, if the defects occur in the following instances:
• Every 28.3 mm (1.11 in.) of the page
• Every 72.4 mm (2.85 in.) of the page
REPLACE THE FUSER
Replace the fuser if print defects occur in the following instances:
• Every 47.4 mm (1.87 in.) of the page
• Every 94.8 mm (3.73 in.) of the page
• Every 113 mm (4.45 in.) of the page
Shadow images appear on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS
Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray:
1 From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct paper type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the paper type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the paper type from the Print dialog.
MAKE SURE THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR IS NOT DEFECTIVE
Replace the defective photoconductor.
MAKE SURE THE PRINT OR TONER CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER
1 Remove the cartridge.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print
quality of future print jobs.
2 Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.
3 Reinsert the cartridge.
Note: If print quality does not improve, then replace the cartridge.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
315
CONTACT CUSTOMER SUPPORT
If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced.
Skewed print
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PAPER GUIDES
Adjust the length and width guides in the tray to the correct positions for the paper size loaded.
• Make sure the guides are not too far from the paper stack.
• Make sure the guides are not pressing too lightly against the paper stack.
CHECK THE PAPER
Make sure you are using paper that meets the printer specifications.
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER IS CLEAN OR IS NOT CONTAMINATED WITH PAPER DUST
Clean the exterior of the printer
1 Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the wall outlet.
Warning—Potential Damage: To avoid the risk of electric shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer,
unplug the power cord from the wall outlet and disconnect all cables to the printer before proceeding.
2 Remove paper from the standard exit bin.
3 Dampen a clean, lint-free cloth with water.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents, as they may damage the finish of
the printer.
4 Wipe only the exterior of the printer, making sure to include the standard exit bin.
Warning—Potential Damage: Using a damp cloth to clean the interior may cause damage to your printer.
5 Make sure the paper support and standard exit bin are dry before beginning a new print job.
MAKE SURE THE PAPER FEED ROLLERS ARE CLEAN AND ARE NOT CONTAMINATED WITH DUST
1 Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
2 Remove the paper feed rollers.
Note: For instructions on how to remove and reinstall the paper feed rollers, see the setup sheet that came with
the rollers inside the compartment box of Tray 1.
3 Dampen a clean, lint-free cloth with water.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
316
4 Clean the paper feed rollers.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the rubber. Doing so will damage the rollers.
5 Reinstall the paper feed rollers.
Note: Make sure to replace the worn or defective paper feed rollers.
Solid color pages
MAKE SURE THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR IS NOT DEFECTIVE AND IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY
Remove and then reinstall the photoconductor. If the problem continues, then the photoconductor may need to be
replaced.
Black or white streaks appear on transparencies or paper
Try one or more of the following:
ENSURE THAT THE FILL PATTERN IS CORRECT
If the fill pattern is incorrect, choose a different fill pattern from your software program.
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE
• Use only the recommended transparencies.
• Ensure that the Paper Type setting matches what is loaded in the tray or feeder.
• Ensure that the Paper Texture setting is correct for the type of paper or specialty media loaded in the tray or
feeder.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
317
MAKE SURE THE PRINT CARTRIDGE IS NOT LOW ON TONER
When 88.xx [color] cartridge lowappears, make sure the toner is distributed evenly within the print
cartridge:
1 Remove the print cartridge.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to touch the photoconductor drum. Doing so may affect the print
quality of future print jobs.
2 Firmly shake the cartridge side-to-side and front-to-back several times to redistribute the toner.
3 Reinsert the print cartridge.
If the problem continues, the printer may need to be serviced. For more information, contact Customer Support.
Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Try one or more of the following:
SELECT ANOTHER TRAY OR FEEDER
• From the printer control panel Paper Menu, select Default Source.
• For Windows users, select the paper source from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop‑up menus.
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO WORN, DEFECTIVE, OR EMPTY TONER CARTRIDGE
Replace the worn, defective, or empty toner cartridge.
CLEAR THE PAPER PATH AROUND THE TONER CARTRIDGE
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
Clear any paper you see or clean any visible toner from the paper path. If the problem persists, then contact Customer
Support.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
318
Streaked vertical lines appear on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Try one or more of the following:
SELECT ANOTHER TRAY OR FEEDER
• From the printer control panel Paper menu, select Default Source
• For Windows users, select the paper source from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, select the paper source from the Print dialog and pop‑up menus.
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO WORN, DEFECTIVE, OR EMPTY TONER CARTRIDGE
Replace the worn, defective, or empty toner cartridge.
CLEAR THE PAPER PATH AROUND THE TONER CARTRIDGE
Check the paper path around the toner cartridge.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
Clear any paper you see.
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO TONER IN THE PAPER PATH
Toner fog or background shading appears on the page
Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THE TONER CARTRIDGE IS INSTALLED CORRECTLY OR IS NOT DEFECTIVE
Reinstall or replace the defective toner cartridge.
MAKE SURE THE TRANSFER MODULE IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE
Replace the worn or defective transfer module.
MAKE SURE THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE
Replace the word or defective photoconductor unit.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
319
MAKE SURE THE FUSER IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE
Replace the worn or defective fuser.
MAKE SURE THE PRINTER HAS RECALIBRATED RECENTLY
Perform color adjust from the Quality menu.
MAKE SURE THE APPLICATION HAS NOT SPECIFIED AN OFF‑WHITE BACKGROUND
Check the application settings.
MAKE SURE NO TONER IS IN THE PAPER PATH
Contact customer support.
Toner rubs off
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE AND WEIGHT SETTINGS
Make sure the paper type and weight settings match the paper loaded in the tray or feeder:
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type and Paper Weight settings. Change the Paper
Weight setting from Normal to Heavy.
2 Before sending the print job, specify the correct paper type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the paper type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the paper type from the Print dialog.
CHECK THE PAPER TEXTURE SETTING
From the printer control panel Paper menu, make sure the Paper Texture setting matches the paper loaded in the
tray or feeder. If necessary, change the Paper Texture setting from Normal to Rough.
MAKE SURE THE FUSER IS NOT WORN OR DEFECTIVE
Replace the worn or defective fuser. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the replacement
part.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
320
Toner specks
Try one or more of the following:
MAKE SURE THERE IS NO DEFECTIVE TONER CARTRIDGE
Replace the defective or worn cartridges.
MAKE SURE THE PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT IS NOT DEFECTIVE
Replace the defective photoconductor unit.
CALL CUSTOMER SUPPORT
Transparency print quality is poor
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE TRANSPARENCIES
Use only transparencies that meet the printer specifications.
CHECK THE PAPER TYPE SETTING
Make sure the paper type setting is set to Transparency:
1 From the printer control panel Paper menu, check the Paper Type setting.
2 Before sending the job to print, specify the correct type setting:
• For Windows users, specify the type from Print Properties.
• For Macintosh users, specify the type from the Print dialog.
Solving color quality problems
FAQ about color printing
What is RGB color?
Red, green, and blue light can be added together in various amounts to produce a large range of colors observed in
nature. For example, red and green can be combined to create yellow. Televisions and computer monitors create
colors in this manner. RGB color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount of red, green, or blue
needed to produce a certain color.
What is CMYK color?
Cyan, magenta, yellow, and black inks or toners can be printed in various amounts to produce a large range of colors
observed in nature. For example, cyan and yellow can be combined to create green. Printing presses, inkjet printers,
and color laser printers create colors in this manner. CMYK color is a method of describing colors by indicating the
amount of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black needed to reproduce a particular color.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
321
How is color specified in a document to be printed?
Software programs typically specify document color using RGB or CMYK color combinations. Additionally, they allow
users to modify the color of each object in a document. For more information, see the software program Help topics.
How does the printer know what color to print?
When a user prints a document, information describing the type and color of each object is sent to the printer. The
color information is passed through color conversion tables that translate the color into the appropriate amounts of
cyan, magenta, yellow, and black toner needed to produce the desired color. The object information determines the
application of color conversion tables. For example, it is possible to apply one type of color conversion table to text
while applying a different color conversion table to photographic images.
Why doesn't the printed color match the color I see on the computer screen?
The color conversion tables used in Auto Color Correction mode generally approximate the colors of a standard
computer monitor. However, because of technology differences that exist between printers and monitors, there are
many colors that can also be affected by monitor variations and lighting conditions. For recommendations on how
the printer color sample pages may be useful in solving certain color‑matching problems, see the question, “How
can I match a particular color (such as a corporate logo)?”
The printed page appears tinted. Can I adjust the color?
Sometimes a printed page may appear tinted (for example, everything printed seems to be too red). This can be
caused by environmental conditions, paper type, lighting conditions, or user preference. In these instances, adjust
the Color Balance setting to create a more preferable color. Color Balance provides the user with the ability to make
subtle adjustments to the amount of toner being used in each color plane. Selecting positive or negative values for
cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (from the Color Balance menu) will slightly increase or decrease the amount of
toner used for the chosen color. For example, if a printed page has a red tint, then decreasing both magenta and
yellow could potentially improve the color balance.
My color transparencies seem dark when they are projected. Is there anything I can do to improve the color?
This problem most commonly occurs when projecting transparencies with reflective overhead projectors. To obtain
the highest projected color quality, transmissive overhead projectors are recommended. If a reflective projector
must be used, then adjusting the Toner Darkness setting to 1, 2, or 3 will lighten the transparency. Make sure to print
on the recommended type of color transparencies.
What is manual color correction?
When manual color correction is enabled, the printer employs user‑selected color conversion tables to process
objects. However, Color Correction must be set to Manual, or no user‑defined color conversion will be implemented.
Manual color correction settings are specific to the type of object being printed (text, graphics, or images), and how
the color of the object is specified in the software program (RGB or CMYK combinations).
Notes:
• Manual color correction is not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK
combinations. It is also not effective in situations in which the software program or the computer operating
system controls the adjustment of colors.
• The color conversion tables—applied to each object when Color Correction is set to Auto—generate preferred
colors for the majority of documents.
To manually apply a different color conversion table:
1 From the Quality menu, select Color Correction, and then select Manual.
2 From the Quality menu, select Manual Color, and then select the appropriate color conversion table for the
affected object type.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
322
Manual Color menu
Object type
Color conversion tables
RGB Image
RGB Text
• Vivid—Produces brighter, more saturated colors and may be applied
to all incoming color formats.
• sRGB Display—Produces an output that approximates the colors
displayed on a computer monitor. Black toner usage is optimized for
printing photographs.
RGB Graphics
• Display—True Black—Produces an output that approximates the
colorsdisplayedon a computermonitor. Usesonly black tonerto create
all levels of neutral gray.
• sRGB Vivid—Provides an increased color saturation for the sRGB
Display color correction. Black usage is optimized for printing business
graphics.
• Off—No color correction is implemented.
CMYK Image
CMYK Text
• US CMYK—Applies color correction to approximate the SWOP
(Specifications for Web Offset Publishing) color output.
• Euro CMYK—Applies color correction to approximated EuroScale color
output.
CMYK Graphics
• Vivid CMYK—Increases the color saturation of the US CMYK color
correction setting.
• Off—No color correction is implemented.
How can I match a particular color (such as a corporate logo)?
From the printer Quality menu, nine types of Color Samples sets are available. These are also available from the Color
Samples page of the Embedded Web Server. Selecting any sample set generates a multiple‑page printout consisting
of hundreds of colored boxes. Either a CMYK or RGB combination is located on each box, depending on the table
selected. The observed color of each box is obtained by passing the CMYK or RGB combination labeled on the box
through the selected color conversion table.
By examining Color Samples sets, a user can identify the box whose color is the closest to the desired color. The color
combination labeled on the box can then be used for modifying the color of the object in a software program. For
more information, see the software program Help topics. Manual color correction may be necessary to utilize the
selected color conversion table for the particular object.
Selecting which Color Samples set to use for a particular color‑matching problem depends on the Color Correction
setting being used (Auto, Off, or Manual), the type of object being printed (text, graphics, or images), and how the
color of the object is specified in the software program (RGB or CMYK combinations). When the printer Color
Correction settingissettoOff, the color isbased on the printjob information; and no colorconversion isimplemented.
Note: The Color Samples pages are not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK
combinations. Additionally, certain situations exist in which the software program or the computer operating
system adjusts the RGB or CMYK combinations specified in the program through color management. The resulting
printed color may not be an exact match of the Color Samples pages.
What are detailed Color Samples and how do I access them?
Detailed Color Samples sets are available only through the Embedded Web Server of a network printer. A detailed
Color Samples set contains a range of shades (displayed as colored boxes) that are similar to a user‑defined RGB or
CMYK value. The likeness of the colors in the set are dependent on the value entered in the RGB or CMYK Increment
box.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
323
To access a detailed Color Samples set from the Embedded Web Server:
1 Type the printer IP address or host name in the address field of your Web browser.
Note: If you do not know the IP address or host name of the printer, then you can:
• View the information on the printer control panel home screen, or in the TCP/IP section under the
Networks/Ports menu.
• Print a network setup page or menu settings page and locate the information in the TCP/IP section.
2 Click Configuration > Color Samples > Detailed Options.
3 Select a color conversion table.
4 Enter the RGB or CMYK color number.
5 Enter an increment value from 1–255.
Note: The closer the value is to 1, the narrower the color sample range will appear.
6 Click Print.
Embedded Web Server does not open
Try one or more of the following:
CHECK THE NETWORK CONNECTION
Make sure the printer and computer are turned on and connected to the same network.
CHECK THE ADDRESS ENTERED IN THE WEB BROWSER
• Depending on the network settings, you may need totype “https://” instead of “http://” before the printer
IP address to access the Embedded Web Server. For more information, contact your system support person.
• Make sure printer IP address is correct.
TEMPORARILY DISABLE WEB PROXY SERVERS
Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing certain Web sites including the Embedded Web Server. For
more information, contact your system support person.
Contacting customer support
When you call customer support, describe the problem you are experiencing, the message on the display, and the
troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution.
You need to know your printer model type and serial number. For more information, see the label on the inside top
front cover of the printer. The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page.
In the U.S. or Canada, call 1‑800‑539‑6275. For other countries or regions, visit the Lexmark Web site at
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices
324
Notices
Product information
Product name:
Lexmark X746x, X748x
Machine type:
7526
Model(s):
576, 776
Edition notice
April 2012
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:
LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain
transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the
information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the products or
the programs described may be made at any time.
References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make
these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is not intended to
state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program,
or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead. Evaluation and verification
of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services, except those expressly designated by the
manufacturer, are the user’s responsibility.
If you don't have access to the Internet, you can contact Lexmark by mail:
Lexmark International, Inc.
Bldg 004-2/CSC
740 New Circle Road NW
Lexington, KY 40550
USA
© 2011 Lexmark International, Inc.
All rights reserved.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices
325
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RIGHTS
This software and any accompanying documentation provided under this agreement are commercial computer
software and documentation developed exclusively at private expense.
Trademarks
Lexmark, Lexmark with diamond design, MarkNet, and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc.,
registered in the United States and/or other countries.
MarkTrack and PrintCryption are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc.
Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company’s designation of a
set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer is intended to be
compatible with the PCL language. This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application
programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.
The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of these companies:
Albertus
The Monotype Corporation plc
Monsieur Marcel OLIVE
Antique Olive
Apple-Chancery
Arial
Apple Computer, Inc.
The Monotype Corporation plc
CG Times
Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc, is a product of
Agfa Corporation
Chicago
Clarendon
Eurostile
Geneva
Apple Computer, Inc.
Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Nebiolo
Apple Computer, Inc.
GillSans
Helvetica
Hoefler
The Monotype Corporation plc
Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry
ITC Avant Garde Gothic International Typeface Corporation
ITC Bookman
ITC Mona Lisa
ITC Zapf Chancery
Joanna
International Typeface Corporation
International Typeface Corporation
International Typeface Corporation
The Monotype Corporation plc
Arthur Baker
Marigold
Monaco
Apple Computer, Inc.
New York
Apple Computer, Inc.
Oxford
Arthur Baker
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices
326
Palatino
Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Agfa Corporation
Stempel Garamond
Taffy
Times New Roman
Univers
The Monotype Corporation plc
Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple, Inc.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information statement
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The FCC Class A limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment
is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case
the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended
cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could
void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class A computing device,
use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for
USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC
regulations.
Modular component notice
Wireless‑equipped models contain the following modular component(s):
Lexmark regulatory type/model LEX-M01-003; FCC ID: IYLM01003; IC: 2376A-M01003
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices
327
Noise emission levels
The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
1-meter average sound pressure, dBA
Printing
Scanning
Copying
Ready
53 dBA
54 dBA
54 dBA
35 dBA
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive
The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the European
Union. We encourage the recycling of our products. If you have further questions about recycling options, visit the
Product disposal
Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste. Consult your local authorities
for disposal and recycling options.
Temperature information
Ambient temperature
15.6-32.2°C (60-90°F)
Shipping and storage temperature
-40° to 40°C (-40 to 104°F)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices
328
Static sensitivity notice
This symbol identifies static-sensitive parts. Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching the
metal frame of the printer.
ENERGY STAR
Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start-up screen is certified to comply
with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Lexmark.
Laser notice
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR Subchapter J for Class I (1) laser
products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-1.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b) laser that is
nominally a 7 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 655-675 nanometers. The laser system
and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal
operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service condition.
Laser advisory label
A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices
329
DANGER - Invisible laser radiation when cartridges are removed and interlock defeated. Avoid exposure to laser beam.
PERIGO - Radiação a laser invisível será liberada se os cartuchos forem removidos e o lacre rompido. Evite a exposição aos feixes de laser.
Opasnost - Nevidljivo lasersko zračenje kada su kasete uklonjene i poništena sigurnosna veza. Izbjegavati izlaganje zracima.
NEBEZPEČÍ - Když jsou vyjmuty kazety a je odblokována pojistka, ze zařízení je vysíláno neviditelné laserové záření. Nevystavujte se působení laserového paprsku.
FARE - Usynlig laserstråling, når patroner fjernes, og spærreanordningen er slået fra. Undgå at blive udsat for laserstrålen.
GEVAAR - Onzichtbare laserstraling wanneer cartridges worden verwijderd en een vergrendeling wordt genegeerd. Voorkom blootstelling aan de laser.
DANGER - Rayonnements laser invisibles lors du retrait des cartouches et du déverrouillage des loquets. Eviter toute exposition au rayon laser.
VAARA - Näkymätöntä lasersäteilyä on varottava, kun värikasetit on poistettu ja lukitus on auki. Vältä lasersäteelle altistumista.
GEFAHR - Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung beim Herausnehmen von Druckkassetten und offener Sicherheitssperre. Laserstrahl meiden.
ΚΙΝΔΥΝΟΣ - Έκλυση αόρατης ακτινοβολίας laser κατά την αφαίρεση των κασετών και την απασφάλιση της μανδάλωσης. Αποφεύγετε την έκθεση στην ακτινοβολία laser.
VESZÉLY – Nem látható lézersugárzás fordulhat elő a patronok eltávolításakor és a zárószerkezet felbontásakor. Kerülje a lézersugárnak való kitettséget.
PERICOLO - Emissione di radiazioni laser invisibili durante la rimozione delle cartucce e del blocco. Evitare l´esposizione al raggio laser.
FARE – Usynlig laserstråling når kassettene tas ut og sperren er satt ut av spill. Unngå eksponering for laserstrålen.
NIEBEZPIECZEŃSTWO - niewidzialne promieniowanie laserowe podczas usuwania kaset i blokady. Należy unikać naświetlenia promieniem lasera.
ОПАСНО! Невидимое лазерное излучение при извлеченных картриджах и снятии блокировки. Избегайте воздействия лазерных лучей.
Pozor – Nebezpečenstvo neviditeľného laserového žiarenia pri odobratých kazetách a odblokovanej poistke. Nevystavujte sa lúčom.
PELIGRO: Se producen radiaciones láser invisibles al extraer los cartuchos con el interbloqueo desactivado. Evite la exposición al haz de láser.
FARA – Osynlig laserstrålning när patroner tas ur och spärrmekanismen är upphävd. Undvik exponering för laserstrålen.
危险 - 当移除碳粉盒及互锁失效时会产生看不见的激光辐射，请避免暴露在激光光束下。
。
危險 - 移除碳粉匣與安全連續開關失效時會產生看不見的雷射輻射。請避免曝露在雷射光束下
危険 - カートリッジが取り外され、内部ロックが無効になると、見えないレーザー光が放射されます。 このレーザー光に当たらないようにしてください。
Power consumption
Product power consumption
The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
Mode
Printing
Copy
Description
Power consumption (Watts)
The product is generating hard‑copy output from electronic inputs.
560 W
600 W
The product is generating hard‑copy output from hard‑copy original
documents.
Scan
The product is scanning hard‑copy documents.
85 W
Ready
The product is waiting for a print job.
55 W
Sleep Mode The product is in a high‑level energy‑saving mode.
11.0 W
0.5 W
Hibernate The product is in a low‑level energy‑saving mode.
Off
The product is plugged into a wall outlet, but the power switch is turned off. 0 W
The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements. Instantaneous
power draws may be substantially higher than the average.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices
330
Sleep Mode
This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Sleep Mode. The Sleep Mode saves energy by lowering
power consumption during extended periods of inactivity. The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged after this product
is not used for a specified period of time, called the Sleep Mode Timeout.
Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product (in minutes):
30
By using the configuration menus, the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 240 minutes. Setting
the SleepMode Timeouttoa lowvalue reducesenergy consumption, but may increase the response time ofthe product.
Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but uses more energy.
Off mode
If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product power
consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the wall outlet.
Total energy usage
It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are provided in
power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in
order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's energy usage.
European Community (EC) directives conformity
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC and 2006/95/EC
on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility
and safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.
Radio interference notice
Warning
This is a product that complies with the emission requirements of EN55022 Class A limits and immunity requirements
of EN55024. This product is not intended to be used in residential/domestic environments.
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case the user
may be required to take adequate measures.
Industry Canada compliance statement
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Standard
ICES-003.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices
331
Avis de conformité aux normes de l’industrie du Canada
Cet appareil numérique de classe A est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux équipements
pouvant causer des interférences NMB-003.
Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment
This section contains regulatory information pertaining to products that contain telecommunication terminal
equipment such as facsimile.
Notice to users of the US telephone network: FCC requirements
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council
for Terminal Attachments (ACTA). On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a
product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to your telephone
company.
This equipment uses the RJ-11C Universal Service Order Code (USOC) jack.
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises’ wiring and telephone network must comply with the
applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is
provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See your
setup documentation for more information.
The RingerEquivalence Number(REN) is used todetermine the number of devices that may be connected toa telephone
line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most
but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be
connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact your local telephone company. For products approved
after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.
The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (for example, 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products,
the REN is shown separately on the label.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that
temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will
notify the customer as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the
operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to
make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
If you experience trouble with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, contact Lexmark International, Inc.
at www.lexmark.com or your Lexmark representative. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the
telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
This equipment contains no user serviceable parts. For repair and warranty information, contact Lexmark International,
Inc. See the previous paragraph for contact information.
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service
commission, or corporation commission for information.
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this
equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment,
consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices
332
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer
terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is
recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is
connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter's
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in
the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical
surges.
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic
device, including fax machines, to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a margin at the top or
bottom of each transmitted page or onthe first page of the transmission, the date andtime it issent andan identification
of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending
machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or
any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)
See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine.
South Africa telecommunications notice
This modem must be used in conjunction with an approved surge protection device when connected to the PSTN.
Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is
an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The terminus of
an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of
all the devices does not exceed five. The modem REN is located on the rear of the equipment on the product labeling.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer
terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is
recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is
connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter’s
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in
the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical
surges.
This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks.
Avis réservé aux utilisateurs du réseau téléphonique du Canada
Ce produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques d’Industrie Canada. Le numéro REN (ringer equivalence number :
numéro d’équivalence de sonnerie) fournit une indication du nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant être connectés
à l’interface téléphonique. En bout de ligne, le nombre d’appareils qui peuvent être connectés n’est pas directement
limité, mais la somme des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas dépasser cinq. Le numéro REN du modem est indiqué sur
l’étiquette produit située à l’arrière de l’équipement.
Les compagnies de téléphone constatent que les surtensions électriques, en particulier celles dues à la foudre,
entraînent d'importants dégâts sur les terminaux privés connectés à des sources d’alimentation CA. Il s’agit-là d’un
problème majeur d’échelle nationale. En conséquence, il vous est recommandé de brancher un parasurtenseur dans
la prise de courant à laquelle l’équipement est connecté. Utilisez un parasurtenseur répondant à des caractéristiques
nominales satisfaisantes et certifié par le laboratoire d’assureurs UL (Underwriter’s Laboratories), un autre laboratoire
agréé de type NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory) ou un organisme de certification agréé dansvotre région
ou pays. Ceci prévient tout endommagement de l’équipement causé par les orages et autres surtensions électriques.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices
333
Cet équipement utilise des prises de téléphone CA11A.
Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network
The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions. The grant ofa telepermit for any item of terminal
equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection
to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above
all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of telepermitted
equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network
services.
This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom's 111 Emergency Service.
This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same line.
This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom
customers.
Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment
associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance
to Telecom's specifications:
• There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual
call initiation, and
• The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the
beginning of the next call attempt.
• The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is not
less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another.
Using this product in Switzerland
This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter (Lexmark part number 14B5109 or 80D1877) to be installed on any line
which receives metering pulses in Switzerland. The Lexmark filter must be used, as metering pulses are present on all
analog telephone lines in Switzerland.
Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse
Cet appareil nécessite l’utilisation d’un filtre de tonalité de facturation suisse (nº de référence Lexmark : 14B5109 ou
80D1877) devant être installé sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse. Ce filtre doit être utilisé
pour toute installation car ces impulsions existent sur toutes les lignes téléphoniques suisses.
Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz
Für dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Zählzeichenübertragung (Lexmark Teilenummer
14B5109 oder 80D1877) für jede Leitung installiert werden, über die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte übertragen werden.
Die Verwendung des Lexmark Filters ist obligatorisch, da in allen analogen Telefonleitungen in der Schweiz
Zeitsteuertakte vorhanden sind.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices
334
Uso del prodotto in Svizzera
Questo prodotto richiede un filtro toni Billing svizzero, (codice Lexmark 14B5109 o 80D1877) da installare su tutte le
linee che ricevono impulsi remoti in Svizzera. È necessario utilizzare il filtro Lexmark poiché gli impulsi remoti sono
presenti su tutte le linee analogiche in Svizzera.
Notice to Users in the European Union
Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC,
2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to
electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits and on radio
equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
Refer to the table at the end of the Notices section for further compliance information.
Regulatory notices for wireless products
This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters,
for example, but not limited to, wireless network cards or proximity card readers.
Exposure to radio frequency radiation
The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits ofthe FCC and other regulatory
agencies. A minimum separation of 20 cm (8 inches) must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for
this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies.
Notice to users in Brazil
Este equipamento opera em carater secundario, isto e, nao tem direito a protecao contra interferencia prejudicial,
mesmo de estacoes do mesmo tipo, e nao pode causar interferencia a sistemas operando em carater primario.
(Res.ANATEL 282/2001).
Industry Canada (Canada)
This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices
335
This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided. Use of any other antenna is strictly prohibited
per regulations of Industry Canada.
To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from
windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to
licensing.
The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF
fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health
Canada's Web site www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
Industry Canada (Canada)
Cet appareil est conforme à la norme RSS-210 d'Industry Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions
suivantes :
(1) cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d'interférences et (2) il doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compris celles
risquant d'altérer son fonctionnement.
Cet appareil a été conçu pour fonctionner uniquement avec l'antenne fournie. L'utilisation de toute autre antenne est
strictement interdite par la réglementation d'Industry Canada.
En application des réglementations d'Industry Canada, l'utilisation d'une antenne de gain supérieur est strictement
interdite.
Pour empêcher toute interférence radio au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, cet appareil doit être utilisé à l'intérieur
et loin des fenêtres afin de garantir une protection optimale.
Si le matériel (ou son antenne d'émission) est installé à l'extérieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence.
L'installateur de cet équipement radio doit veiller à ce que l'antenne soit implantée et dirigée de manière à n'émettre
aucun champ HF dépassant les limites fixées pour l'ensemble de la population par Santé Canada. Reportez-vous au
Code de sécurité 6 que vous pouvez consulter sur le site Web de Santé Canada www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
Le terme « IC » précédant le numéro de d'accréditation/inscription signifie simplement que le produit est conforme
aux spécifications techniques d'Industry Canada.
Taiwan NCC RF notice statement
Notice to users in the European Union
Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC,
2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices
336
electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits, and on
radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment, and the ecodesign of energy-using products.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class A limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950.
Products equipped with 2.4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council
directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, and 1999/5/EC on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the
Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain
voltage limits and on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.
Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries, but is restricted to indoor use only.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY, A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below.
AT
EL
LI
BE
ES
LT
SE
BG
FI
CH
FR
LV
SK
CY
CZ
DE
IE
DK
IS
EE
IT
HR
MT
TR
HU
NL
UK
LU
SI
NO
PL
PT
RO
Česky
Společnost Lexmark International, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že výrobek tento výrobek je ve shodě se základními
požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.
Dansk
Deutsch
Lexmark International, Inc. erklærerherved,at detteprodukt overholderdevæsentlige krav ogøvrigerelevante
krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Hiermit erklärt Lexmark International, Inc., dass sich das Gerät dieses Gerät in Übereinstimmung mit den
grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG
befindet.
Ελληνική ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Η LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ ΑΥΤΟ ΤΟ ΠΡΟΪΟΝ
ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ
ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices
337
English
Español
Eesti
Hereby, Lexmark International, Inc., declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the
essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Por medio de la presente, Lexmark International, Inc. declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos
esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Käesolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International, Inc., et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ
põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele sätetele.
Suomi
Lexmark International, Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä tuote on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten
ja muiden sitä koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen.
Français
Magyar
Íslenska
Italiano
Latviski
Lietuvių
Malti
Par la présente, Lexmark International, Inc. déclare que l'appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences
fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Alulírott, Lexmark International, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a termék megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ
követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
Hér með lýsir Lexmark International, Inc. yfir því að þessi vara er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar
kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.
Con la presente Lexmark International, Inc. dichiara che questo questo prodotto è conforme ai requisiti
essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Ar šo Lexmark International, Inc. deklarē, ka šis izstrādājums atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām
prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.
Šiuo Lexmark International, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas
1999/5/EB direktyvos nuostatas.
Bil-preżenti, Lexmark International, Inc., jiddikjara li dan il-prodott huwa konformi mal-ħtiġijiet
essenzjali u ma dispożizzjonijiet oħrajn relevanti li jinsabu fid-Direttiva 1999/5/KE.
Nederlands Hierbijverklaart LexmarkInternational,Inc. dat het toesteldit product inovereenstemmingismet de essentiële
eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Norsk
Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og
øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Polski
Niniejszym Lexmark International, Inc. oświadcza, że niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi
wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Português A Lexmark International Inc. declara que este este produto está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras
disposições da Diretiva 1999/5/CE.
Slovensky Lexmark International, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že tento produkt spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky
príslušné ustanovenia smernice 1999/5/ES.
Slovensko Lexmark International, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi
relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Svenska
Härmed intygar Lexmark International, Inc. att denna produkt står i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga
egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.
Statement of Limited Warranty
Lexmark X746x, X748x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices
338
Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY
This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the U.S., refer to the country-
specific warranty information that came with your product.
This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use, and not for resale, from
Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer, referred to in this statement as “Remarketer.”
Limited warranty
Lexmark warrants that this product:
—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like new parts
—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship
If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair
or replacement (at Lexmark's option).
If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product
for which it was intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be required to present the feature or option with the
product.
If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that user
for the remainder of the warranty period. You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that
user.
Limited warranty service
The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later
provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end
earlier if it, or its original contents, are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed.
To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You may be required to deliver
your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark, or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location.
You are responsible for loss of, or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location.
When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced becomes the property of the
Remarketer or Lexmark. The replacement may be a new or repaired item.
The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.
Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced, altered, in need of a repair not
included in warranty service, damaged beyond repair, or if the product is not free of all legal obligations, restrictions,
liens, and encumbrances.
Before you present this productforwarranty service, remove all printcartridges, programs, data, and removablestorage
media (unless directed otherwise by Lexmark).
For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact
Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period. For products no longer covered
by a Lexmark warranty, technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notices
339
Extent of limited warranty
Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints
produced by any product.
Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:
—Modification or unauthorized attachments
—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user’s guides, manuals, instructions or guidance
—Unsuitable physical or operating environment
—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer
—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle
—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications
—Refurbishment, repair, refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or parts
—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR
REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH
RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY WARRANTIES THAT
MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD. ALL INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES,
AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE.
Limitation of liability
Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim concerning performance or
nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty, you may recover actual
damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph.
Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product
that caused the damages. This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real
property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR
ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages. Lexmark is not liable for any
claim by you based on a third party claim.
This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark. Lexmark's and its
Suppliers' and Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended
beneficiaries of this limitation.
Additional rights
Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow the exclusion or limitation
of incidental or consequential damages, so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you.
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
340
Index
550‑sheet specialty media drawer
installing 43
840.02 Scanner disabled. Contact
system administrator if problem
persists. 286
88.xx [Color] cartridge critically
low 284
88.xx [color] cartridge nearly
low 285
Numerics
1565 Emulation error, load
550‑sheet tray (standard or
optional)
2,000‑sheet high‑capacity feeder
loading 59
loading 69
57 Configuration change, some held
58 Input config error 280
58 Too many disks installed 281
58 Too many flash options
installed 281
61 Remove defective disk 281
62 Disk full 282
63 Unformatted disk 282
80.xx Replace fuser 282
82.xx Replace waste toner
bottle 282
82.xx Waste toner bottle
missing 283
82.xx Waste toner bottle nearly
full 283
83.xx Replace transfer module 283
83.xx Transfer module life
warning 283
83.xx Transfer module missing 283
83.xx Transfer module near life
warning 283
2000‑sheet drawer
installing 43
A
250 paper jam 267
accessing the Embedded Web
Server 20
29y.xx Close flatbed cover and load
originals if restarting job 285
29y.xx paper jams 267
31.xx Missing or defective [color]
cartridge 277
32.xx [color] cartridge part number
34 Incorrect paper size, open
[src] 277
35 Insufficient memory to support
37 Insufficient memory for Flash
Memory Defragment
operation 278
37 Insufficient memory to collate
job 277
37 Insufficient memory, some Held
Jobs were deleted 278
37 Insufficient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored 278
38 Memory full 278
39 Complex page, some data may
not have printed 278
Active NIC menu 146
adding a date and time stamp 100
ADF
ADF parts
cleaning 229
replacing 239
ADF pick assembly
ordering 236
ADF pick pad
ordering 236
adjusting brightness
adjusting copy quality 97
advanced options, touch‑screen
copy 103
52 Not enough free space in flash
54 Network [x] software error 279
54 Serial option [x] error 279
54 Standard network software
error 279
84.xx [Color] photoconductor
low 284
84.xx [color] photoconductor
missing 283
84.xx [color] photoconductor nearly
low 283
84.xx Replace [color]
photoconductor 284
840.01 Scanner disabled by
admin 286
fax 123
FTP 129
air filter
replacing 239
attaching the system board
cover 26
Automatic Document Feeder
(ADF) 13
55 Unsupported option in slot
[x] 279
550‑sheet drawer
installing 43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
341
available internal options 25
Close front door 271
confidential print jobs 88
printing from a Macintosh
computer 88
Confidential Print menu 161
configuration information
Configure MP menu 139
configuring port settings 55
connecting printer to distinctive
on both sides of the paper
(duplexing) 96
on letterhead 94
on transparencies 94
photos 94
placing separator sheets between
copies 98
quick copy 93
reducing 97
selecting a tray 95
using the scanner glass
(flatbed) 94
copying different paper sizes 96
copying multiple pages on one
sheet 99
copying on both sides of the paper
(duplexing) 96
copying on letterhead 94
copying photos 94
creating a fax destination shortcut
using the Embedded Web
Server 117
creating an FTP shortcut
using the Embedded Web
Server 125
creating profiles
using the ScanBack Utility 130
custom name
B
blocking junk faxes 120
buttons, printer control panel 14
buttons, touch screen
using 18
C
cables
Ethernet 44
USB 44
canceling
canceling a print job
from the printer control panel 92
canceling an e-mail 108
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 323
card stock
tips 91
Change [paper source] to [custom
string] 271
Change [paper source] to [custom
Change [paper source] to [paper
type] [paper size] 271
checking an unresponsive
printer 270
checking an unresponsive
scanner 293
checking status of parts and
supplies 234
checking the status of parts and
supplies 234
connecting the printer to
conservation settings
conserving supplies 217
copy quality
adjusting 97
copy screen
Copy Settings menu 174
copy troubleshooting
copier does not respond 290
partial document or photo
copies 292
poor copy quality 290
poor scanned image quality 293
copying
adding a date and time stamp 100
adjusting quality 97
configuring 75
Custom Names menu 144
custom paper type name
assigning 75
creating 75
Custom Scan Sizes menu 144
Custom Type [x]
Custom Types menu 143
checking the virtual display
using the Embedded Web
Server 251
checking virtual display
using the Embedded Web
Server 251
choosing a fax connection 112
cleaning
D
date and time, fax
setting 116
Default Source menu 136
directory list
printing 89
custom job (job build) 99
enlarging 97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
342
Error reading USB drive. Remove
USB 272
Ethernet networking
Macintosh 52
Windows 52
exporting a configuration
using the Embedded Web
Server 23
exterior of the printer
cleaning 228
fax connection
connecting the printer to the wall
jack 113
connecting to a DSL line 113
fax connections
fax log
viewing 120
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup)
menu 187
Fax partition inoperative. Contact
fax screen
Fax server 'To Format' not set up.
Fax Station Number not set up 273
fax troubleshooting
caller ID is not shown 295
can receive but not send
faxes 297
can send but not receive
faxes 297
received fax has poor print
quality 298
Disk Wiping menu 161
display troubleshooting
display is blank 286
disposing of printer hard disk 223
distinctive ring service, fax
documents, printing
from Macintosh 84
duplexing 96
e‑mail
canceling 108
e‑mail alerts
E
setting up 251
Edit Security Setups menu 159
Embedded Web Server
accessing 20
e‑mail function
setting up 104
e‑mail screen
e‑mail shortcuts, creating
using the Embedded Web
Server 105
administrator settings 251
checking the status of
supplies 234
creating a fax destination
shortcut 117
initial fax setup 112
Embedded Web Server
Administrator's Guide
emission
encrypting the printer hard
disk 225
enlarging a copy 97
envelopes
loading 71
tips 90
e‑mail, sending
e‑mailing
creating shortcuts using the
creating shortcuts using the
using the printer control
panel 106
faxing
canceling a fax job 121
choosing a fax connection 112
configuring the printer to observe
creating shortcuts using the
creating shortcuts using the
distinctive ring service 114
fax setup 112
sending a fax 118
sending a fax at a scheduled
time 120
F
factory defaults
restoring 221
fax and e‑mail functions
setting up 295
sending using the printer control
panel 117
fax and e‑mail functions are not set
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
343
setting the fax number or station
number 115
Hibernate Mode
using 220
numbers 254
jams, clearing
setting the outgoing fax name or
fiber optic
finding more information about the
printer 9
home screen
hiding icons 20
showing icons 20
home screen buttons and icons
description 16
250 paper jam 267
290–294 229
29y.xx paper jams 267
HTML menu 214
Finishing menu 204
firmware card
installing 32
I
L
icons on the home screen
hiding 20
showing 20
labels, paper
tips 91
flash drive
letterhead
loading, 2,000‑sheet high‑capacity
printing from 86
Flash Drive menu 197
flash drives
flash memory card
installing 32
troubleshooting 304
font sample list
printing 89
Forms and Favorites
setting up 21
forwarding faxes 124
FTP
FTP address
creating shortcuts using the touch
screen 126
Image menu 215
importing a configuration
using the Embedded Web
Server 23
initial fax setup 112
using the Embedded Web
Server 112
installing on a wireless network
installing options
order of installation 42
installing printer
on wireless network 48
installing printer on a network
installing printer on a wireless
network
using Macintosh 50
interior of the printer
cleaning 228
internal print server
troubleshooting 305
Internal Solutions Port
changing port settings 55
installing 33
troubleshooting 305
IPv6 menu 150
feeder 69
light colored line, white line, or
incorrectly colored line appears on
prints 309
Load [paper source] with [custom
string] 273
Load [paper source] with [custom
Load [paper source] with [paper
size] 274
Load [paper source] with [paper
type] [paper size] 274
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
string] 274
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
size] 274
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
type] [paper size] 275
loading
2,000‑sheet high‑capacity
FTP screen
FTP Settings menu 193
fuser
ordering 235
G
green settings
feeder 69
550‑sheet tray (standard or
optional) 59
envelopes 71
letterhead in 2,000‑sheet
optional 550‑sheet special media
tray 63
H
J
printing from a Macintosh
computer 88
Help menu 216
jams
avoiding 253
locating jam areas 254
locations 254
transparencies 71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
344
loading the optional special media
tray 63
PDF 211
PostScript 211
optional tray
loading 59
options
550‑sheet specialty media
drawer 43
Quality 205
locking the system board 223
Set Date/Time 165
Setup 202
SMTP Setup menu 158
Standard Network 146
Standard USB 152
Supplies 134
TCP/IP 148
Universal Setup 144
Utilities 210
Wireless 150
XPS 211
menus diagram 133
multipurpose feeder
loading 71
firmware cards 25
list 25
network 25
M
making copies using paper from
selected tray 95
Max Speed and Max Yield
using 85
memory
memory card
order of installation 42
ports 25
installing 30
troubleshooting 304
Memory full, cannot print
faxes 275
menu settings page
printing 58
menus
Active NIC 146
options, touch‑screen
AppleTalk 151
My MFP
setting up 22
troubleshooting, forgot
password 302
Copy Settings 174
Custom Scan Sizes 144
Custom Types 143
Finishing 204
scan 131
ordering
fuser 235
photoconductors 236
output file type
N
Network [x] menu 146
Network Card menu 148
network setup page
changing 107
printing 58
Networking Guide
No analog phone line connected to
erasing 224
P
paper
General Settings 166
Help 216
HTML 214
Image 215
characteristics 77
letterhead 78
preprinted forms 78
saving 99
IPv6 150
Miscellaneous 160
Paper Loading 142
Paper Size/Type 136
Parallel [x] 153
selecting 78
storing 80
O
paper feed troubleshooting
message remains after jam is
cleared 306
optional 550‑sheet special media
tray
loading 63
optional special media tray
loading 63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
345
paper jams
avoiding 253
print quality
unexpected page breaks
occur 290
printer
cleaning the ADF parts 229
replacing photoconductors 246
print quality troubleshooting
blank pages 313
paper jams, clearing
250 paper jam 267
290–294 229
29y.xx paper jams 267
Paper Loading menu 142
paper size
setting 59
Universal 144
paper sizes
basic model 11
fully configured 11
shipping 250
printer control panel 14
printer hard disk
encrypting 225
light colored line, white line, or
incorrectly colored line appears
supported 81
paper type
setting 59
paper types
poor transparency quality 320
installing 37
removing 41
troubleshooting 304
wiping 225
Paper Weight menu 140
paper weights
parts
checking status 234
checking, from printer control
panel 234
checking, using the Embedded
PDF menu 211
photoconductor
replacing 246
photoconductors
ordering 236
photos
copying 94
pick pad
replacing 239
pick roller assembly
replacing 239
placing separator sheets between
copies 98
port settings
configuring 55
PostScript menu 211
print job
repeating defects 313
shadow images appear on
prints 314
skewed print 315
solid color pages 316
streaked horizontal lines appear
streaked vertical lines on
prints 318
toner fog or background shading
printer hard disk memory
erasing 225
printer information
printer messages
1565 Emulation error, load
29y.xx Close flatbed cover and
load originals if restarting
job 285
31.xx Missing or defective [color]
cartridge 277
32.xx [color] cartridge part
number unsupported by
device 277
34 Incorrect paper size, open
[src] 277
35 Insufficient memory to support
37 Insufficient memory for Flash
Memory Defragment
operation 278
37 Insufficient memory to collate
job 277
print troubleshooting
incorrect characters print 289
jammed pages are not
reprinted 306
job prints from wrong tray 289
multiple‑language PDF files do not
print 286
37 Insufficient memory, some
Held Jobs were deleted 278
37 Insufficient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored 278
38 Memory full 278
paper curl 309
paper frequently jams 306
print job takes longer than
expected 288
tray linking does not work 289
39 Complex page, some data may
not have printed 278
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
346
84.xx [Color] photoconductor
low 284
84.xx [color] photoconductor
missing 283
84.xx [color] photoconductor
84.xx Replace [color]
photoconductor 284
840.01 Scanner disabled by
admin 286
840.02 Scanner disabled. Contact
system administrator if problem
persists. 286
88.xx [Color] cartridge critically
low 284
88.xx [color] cartridge
88.xx [color] cartridge nearly
low 285
an error has occurred with the
Change [paper source] to [custom
string] 271
Change [paper source] to [custom
Change [paper source] to [paper
type] [paper size] 271
Close front door 271
Disk near full. Securely clearing
disk space. 272
Load [paper source] with [custom
52 Not enough free space in flash
53 Unformatted flash
detected 279
54 Network [x] software error 279
54 Serial option [x] error 279
54 Standard network software
error 279
55 Unsupported option in slot
[x] 279
56 Standard USB port
disabled 280
57 Configuration change, some
58 Input config error 280
58 Too many disks installed 281
58 Too many flash options
installed 281
61 Remove defective disk 281
62 Disk full 282
63 Unformatted disk 282
82.xx Replace waste toner
bottle 282
Load [paper source] with [paper
size] 274
Load [paper source] with [paper
type] [paper size] 274
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
string] 274
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
size] 274
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
type] [paper size] 275
Memory full, cannot print
faxes 275
No analog phone line connected
Remove packaging material, [area
name] 275
Remove paper from standard
output bin 275
Replace separator pad 275
SMTP server not set up. Contact
Some held jobs were not
restored 276
Supply needed to complete
job 276
Tray [x] paper size
82.xx Waste toner bottle
missing 283
unsupported 276
82.xx Waste toner bottle nearly
full 283
83.xx Replace transfer
module 283
83.xx Transfer module life
warning 283
83.xx Transfer module
missing 283
83.xx Transfer module near life
warning 283
84 [color] photoconductor
low 246
Disk problem 272
Error reading USB drive. Remove
USB 272
Fax partition inoperative. Contact
Fax server 'To Format' not set up.
Contact system
Weblink server not set up. Contact
printer options troubleshooting
cannot detect flash memory
card 304
cannot detect printer hard
disk 304
administrator. 272
Fax Station Number not set
84 [color] photoconductor nearly
low 246
84 Replace [color]
Load [paper source] with [custom
string] 273
option does not work 303
USB/parallel interface card 305
photoconductor 246
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
347
printer software
installing 46
Remote Operator Panel
setting up 23
ScanBack Utility
using 130
printhead lenses
cleaning 232
printing
canceling, from printer control
panel 92
forms 84
from Macintosh 84
transparencies 90
printing confidential and other held
jobs
publications
Remove packaging material, [area
name] 275
Remove paper from standard
printing from a Macintosh
computer 88
Replace separator pad 275
replacing
replacing supplies
photoconductors 246
waster toner bottle 245
reports
scanner
Automatic Document Feeder
(ADF) 13
scanner glass
cleaning 229
scanner glass (flatbed)
scanning
quick copy 93
scanning to an FTP address
creating shortcuts using the
computer 125
using the printer control
panel 126
scanning to network
destinations 125
viewing 251
printing from a Macintosh
computer 88
resolution, fax
changing 119
restoring factory default
settings 221
security Web page
selecting a location for the
printer 10
S
saving paper 99
Q
scan screen
options 131
scan to computer
Scan to Network
setting up 21
using 125
scan troubleshooting
partial document or photo
scans 294
scanning takes too long or freezes
Quiet Mode
sending a fax using shortcuts 118
sending a fax using the printer
control panel 117
sending an e‑mail using the printer
R
control panel 106
reattaching the system board
cover 26
sending fax
using shortcuts 118
sending fax at a scheduled
time 120
sending fax using the address
book 119
separator pad
ordering 236
replacing 239
Serial [x] menu 155
recycled paper
recycling
WEEE statement 327
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
348
serial printing
setting up 56
setting
TCP/IP address 148
setting the fax number or station
number 115
subject and message information
supplies
checking status 234
checking, from printer control
panel 234
toner darkness
adjusting 85
toner fog or background shading
touch screen
buttons 18
transfer module
ordering 235
transparencies
loading 71
printing on 90
Tray [x] paper size
unsupported 276
trays
troubleshooting
A network destination stopped
working or is invalid 300
an application error has
occurred 298
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 323
checking an unresponsive
printer 270
checking an unresponsive
scanner 293
setting the outgoing fax name or
checking, using the Embedded
conserving 217
setting up e‑mail alerts using the
setting up fax and e‑mail
functions 295
setting up the printer
on a wired network
(Macintosh) 52
storing 237
using recycled paper 217
Supplies menu 134
supplies, ordering
ADF pick assembly 236
fuser 235
photoconductors 236
separator pad 236
supplies, replacing
hotoconductors 246
system board
Setup menu 202
shipping the printer 250
shortcuts, creating
FTP address 126
showing icons on the home
screen 20
Sleep Mode
adjusting 219
SMTP server not set up. Contact
SMTP Setup menu 158
Some held jobs were not
restored 276
standard tray
accessing 26
locking 223
system board cover
attaching 26
reattaching 26
fax and e‑mail functions are not
set up 295
Forms are not available or are not
working 299
nothing happens when USB drive
is inserted 302
printer cannot scan to selected
destination 301
solving basic printer
problems 270
troubleshooting, copy
copier does not respond 290
partial document or photo
copies 292
T
loading 59
telecommunication
tips
status of parts
checking 234
status of supplies
checking 234
storing
paper 80
supplies 237
envelopes 90
letterhead 89
transparencies 90
toner cartridges
ordering 235
streaked horizontal lines appear on
prints 317
recycling 222
replacing 237
poor copy quality 290
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
349
poor scanned image quality 293
repeating defects 313
shadow images appear on
prints 314
USB/parallel interface card
troubleshooting 305
using Forms and Favorites 84
troubleshooting, display
display is blank 286
skewed print 315
troubleshooting, fax
caller ID is not shown 295
can receive but not send
faxes 297
solid color pages 316
streaked horizontal lines appear
streaked vertical lines on
prints 318
using Max Speed and Max Yield 85
using shortcuts
sending fax 118
sending fax 119
can send but not receive
faxes 297
received fax has poor print
quality 298
troubleshooting, paper feed
message remains after jam is
cleared 306
troubleshooting, print
incorrect characters print 289
jammed pages are not
reprinted 306
job prints from wrong tray 289
multiple‑language PDF files do not
print 286
toner fog or background shading
using the ScanBack Utility 130
troubleshooting, printer options
cannot detect flash memory
card 304
cannot detect printer hard
disk 304
option does not work 303
USB/parallel interface card 305
troubleshooting, scan
partial document or photo
scans 294
V
printing from a Macintosh
computer 88
viewing
reports 251
virtual display
checking, using Embedded Web
Server 251
erasing 224
volatility
W
paper curl 309
scanning takes too long or freezes
waste toner bottle
ordering 236
paper frequently jams 306
print job takes longer than
expected 288
replacing 245
Weblink server not set up. Contact
wired network setup
using Macintosh 52
Wireless menu 150
wireless network
configuration information 48
installation, using Macintosh 50
installation, using Windows 48
wireless network setup
tray linking does not work 289
unexpected page breaks
occur 290
troubleshooting, print quality
blank pages 313
light colored line, white line, or
incorrectly colored line appears
poor transparency quality 320
U
understanding the home screen
buttons and icons 16
Universal Paper Size
setting 59
Unsupported USB device, please
remove 272
updating options in printer
driver 47
wireless printer setup
usb drive
nothing happens when
inserted 302
WS‑Scan
about 22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|